JP2021101892A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes an image display device 7 for displaying a plurality of kinds of performance patterns (a left performance symbol 8L, a middle performance symbol 8C, a right performance symbol 8R), and executes a first performance for executing variable display of the plurality of kinds of performance patterns (the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, the right performance symbol 8R), a second performance for displaying a timer image TMR in the image display device 7, and updating the timer image TMR, during execution of the first performance, and a third performance capable of starting a runaway action performance only during execution of the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs various effects using a display screen is common (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, a timer effect is performed to count down the time when the target image is displayed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-198568

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples.

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means for displaying a plurality of production symbols.
The first effect of executing the variable display of the plurality of effect symbols, and
During the execution of the first effect, a second effect of displaying a timer on the display means and updating the timer, and
It is possible to execute the third effect, which can start the specific effect only during the execution of the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
When starting the third effect, the timer is turned off from the display means, and the second effect ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to the application example 1 or the application example 2.
When the timer reaches a predetermined time, the second effect ends without executing the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3.
In the second effect, a plurality of the timers are displayed, and the timers are displayed.
In the third effect, all of the plurality of timers are turned off from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 4.
In the second effect, the remaining time that has been counted down and updated is displayed as the timer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 5.
The specific effect is an SP reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot determination table T1. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a figure when the first movable accessory is in the retracted position, and the light emitting part is in a change mode. It is a figure when the first movable accessory is in the retracted position, and the light emitting part is in the light-off mode. It is a figure when the first movable accessory is in the advance position, and the light emitting part is in a lighting mode. It is a figure when the first movable accessory is in the retracted position, and the light emitting part is in a lighting mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory production D. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable character production E. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable accessory production F. It is a figure for demonstrating another example of the character pattern matching production. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect F. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion production G. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect H. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect I. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion production J. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect K. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect L. It is a figure for demonstrating the maximum round promotion effect M. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect E. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect F. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect G. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect H. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect I. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect J. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect K. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer effect L.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described so as to coincide with the left-right direction seen by the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, a select button 68, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, the end portion of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. To. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and emits light during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like. The select button 68 is a so-called cross key, and is composed of a left button, a right button, an up button, and a down button, and enables various inputs. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding upward from the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , Gate (through chucker) 28, 1st big winning device (1st attacker) 31, 2nd big winning device (2nd attacker) 36, general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and out opening 16 and indicators 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a region and a reserved digested image display region on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C or the hold icon 9C.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect. Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special figure hold or the second special figure hold. Can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the image is digested (“digestion of special figure hold” described later).

Below the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a plate-shaped member can move up and down. The plate-shaped member has the same design as the "7" symbol among the production symbols. This design portion is a light emitting portion 14a capable of changing the light emitting mode. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the lower retracted position (FIG. 1) of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) upward from the retracted position and be stationary at the advanced position. .. The first movable accessory 14 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decorative body 10. A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the center decorative body 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion through which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion through which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a mouth and a fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 is required when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. This is a process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not it is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured. In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operating port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as “special symbol”. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 84e (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the prize is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area (FIG. 5) as the first special figure hold, and if the prize is to the second starting port 21, it is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 84e, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is four for each of the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area. It has become. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 84e is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 84f (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 84f, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 84f is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 clocks a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. The RTC85 and the FRAM® 86, which enable the above, are included. The RTC85 and FRAM® 86 are backed up by a primary or secondary battery (not shown). Therefore, the RTC 85 continues timing even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the FRAM (registered trademark) 86 continues to retain the stored contents. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. Examples thereof include a sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

An external terminal board 70 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 refers to the external terminal board 70 with respect to the prize ball information, the opening information of the door or the frame, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting port 20, and the second starting port 21. It outputs a prize for the game ball, whether or not it is a big hit, and a security signal. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is possible to output schedule information related to setting changes to the external terminal board 70.

A setting changing device 71 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The setting change device 71 makes it possible to set the jackpot probability of the gaming machine in a maximum of 6 stages. The setting changing device 71 will be described later.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launching device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114, and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 by the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92, an RTC 95 that enables timekeeping, and an FRAM® 96. The RTC95 and FRAM® 96 are backed up by a primary or secondary battery (not shown). Therefore, the RTC95 continues timing even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the FRAM (registered trademark) 96 keeps its stored contents. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (effect patterns are displayed). Image data such as) and background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decoration body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the respective operation modes of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 according to the operation pattern data. 2 Controls the operation of the movable accessory 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of the first movable accessory 14 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable accessory 14 has a light emitting unit 14a, and creates light emitting pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a, and emits light. The light emission of the first movable accessory 14 is controlled according to the pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

The effect button 63, the select button 68, and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. When the effect button 63 is pressed (pressed) by the player, the effect button 63 outputs a switch signal to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the effect button 63 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Not only can the effect button 63 be pressed, but the position can be changed between a normal position (buried position) in which the upper surface portion of the button body portion slightly protrudes and a protruding position in which most of the button body portion protrudes. It has become. That is, the effect button 63 is raised as one of the effects. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates position change data (drive data) that changes the position of the effect button 63, and controls the operation of the effect button 63 according to the position change data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the position change data. When the select button 68 is pressed (pressed) by the player, the select button 68 outputs a switch signal to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108.

The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 may be connected to a touch sensor or the like provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when the human body comes into contact with the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the gaming machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 84e, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 84f and a setting information storage region 84g are provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening 8 opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a V flag, a probability change flag, a time saving flag, and the like are set. It is set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 84e includes a first special figure hold storage area in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the second special figure hold storage area, the first storage for storing the random value group (hold information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure hold, respectively. An area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 84f stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose.

The setting information storage area 84g is an area for storing the setting information of the gaming machine set by the setting changing device 71 (FIG. 3). The setting information is numerical information set in 6 steps of setting 1 to setting 6. The setting information storage area 84g is backed up by a backup power source (not shown), and the contents stored in the setting information storage area 84g are retained even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

In the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A), a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, a stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and a setting suggestion effect pattern determination Table T55 and is stored. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a counter set area 94c, and a setting information storage area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The counter set area 94c is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Probability variation effect counter, time saving effect counter, setting suggestion effect counter, look-ahead effect counter, etc. are set. The setting information storage area 94d is an area in which the setting information output from the main control unit side is stored. The setting information storage area 94d is backed up by a power source (not shown), and its contents are retained even when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Here, various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the game machine 1 will be described.
The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows.
The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.
The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a.

The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127.
The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.
The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is the first. 2 It is stored in the special figure reservation storage area. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area 84f.

Next, various random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the gaming machine 1 will be described.
The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number”. The "look-ahead effect random number" is a random number acquired as the value of the look-ahead effect counter set in the counter set area 94c and used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

4. Explanation of Various Tables FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a jackpot determination table T1.
The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. The jackpot determination in the jackpot determination table T1 is performed based on the game state of the gaming machine 1 and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area 84g (FIG. 5). For example, when the setting information is "setting 1" in the "normal probability state" and the jackpot random number value is "0 to 409", it is determined as "big hit" and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than "0 to 409". In the case of "(410 to 65535)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. The reach determination in the reach determination table T2 is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, when the reach random number value is "0 to 13" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined that there is "reach", and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than "0 to 13 (14 to 127)). In the case of "," it is determined that there is no reach. Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is determined to be "no reach".

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. The determination in the normal symbol hit determination table T3 is performed based on the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3 to 255)". ) ”, It is determined to be“ lost ”. Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). The table referenced to do so. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state".

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is used to determine the "big hit type" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table.

In FIG. 8, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the jackpot type is determined. When the random number value is "83 to 127", it is determined that the jackpot type is "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 127", that is, in all cases, the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot". Will be done. In the jackpot type determination table T5, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED) command" of the special game may also be specified.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). ..

In FIG. 9, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 10, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state, and it is determined as "big hit" in the jackpot determination table T1 and "16RV planned passage jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5. When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to 3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

The large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 in the main control main processing (described later). Is. In the present embodiment, in the case of "16RV planned passing jackpot", it is determined as "opening pattern 21". In the "opening pattern 21", the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 10th and 12th to 16th rounds, and the opening count is performed at the 11th round. Once, the first big winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). On the other hand, in the case of "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 22". In the "opening pattern 22", the second large winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 10th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 11th round and the opening time is 0. . Open the first big winning opening 30 (short opening) for 1 second. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later). In the present embodiment, in the case of "16RV planned passing jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 31". In the "opening pattern 31", in the 11th round, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is won. When there is, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is determined as "open pattern 32". In the "opening pattern 32", at the 11th round, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened.

5. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the jackpot is won, a "big hit game" is executed in which the jackpots (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. There are two types of jackpots: "16RV scheduled jackpot" and "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot". The "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. By combining the above-mentioned opening patterns, the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern 21 and the opening pattern 31 are combined. The "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 And it is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. The combination of the above-mentioned opening patterns makes it impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern 22 and the opening pattern 32 are combined. In the "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot", the opening time of the first big winning opening 30 of the 11th R is 0.1 seconds, and the 11R is a round in which the prize ball cannot be expected. ing.

In this way, in the "16RV planned jackpot", it is easy for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a high-accuracy time-shortening state (high-accuracy high). It becomes the base state). On the other hand, in the "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for the V-passing jackpot and the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 45/128 (about 35.2%). On the other hand, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 128/128 (100%) for the jackpot scheduled to pass through V. In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

6. Description of the gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply a "normal probability state (normal probability state). Non-high probability state, low probability state) ". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 7) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. By performing, a high probability state is realized. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 9 and 10) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Determine the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in parallel with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. As the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol hit determination table T3 in which the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. It is used to make a hit judgment (judgment of a normal symbol). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state. Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (120 times in this case), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". The low-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". Further, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed is referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handed striking. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed so that the game ball can be won in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

7. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initialization process (step S001). In the initialization process, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value, normal symbol random number value) by 1. Add and update. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 11: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 11) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors are, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start port sensor detection process (step S103). In the start port sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the passage of the game ball of the gate 28, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter, and uses the acquired random number value in the normal symbol hold storage area 84f of the main RAM 84. Of the first to fourth storage areas, the storage area is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the game ball has won the first starting port 20, and determines the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the game ball has won the second starting port 21, and determines the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter. To get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area.

The game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination in the start port sensor detection process. Based on the above-mentioned random number value group, whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern are determined in advance. Then, a pre-determination command is created from the pre-determination result and set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (step S104). In the normal operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the operation of the electric chew 22. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", and when the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, the normal symbol hit determination table T3 is referred to. Make a hit judgment. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern. After that, the fluctuation display is stopped, and in the case of "hit", the electric chew opening pattern is set with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, and the electric chew 22 is operated.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special operation process (step S105). This special operation process will be described later.
Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the V region sensor detection process (step S106). In the V region sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a, and if so, determines whether or not it is during the V valid period. If the V validity period is in effect, the V flag is turned ON and the V passage command is set.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. ..

After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 12: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed and ended, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation stop command is set and a special operation is performed. Set the status to "3". When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first executes the game state management process. The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" when the jackpot flag is OFF. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is ON, the jackpot opening and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member are set according to the type of winning jackpot. After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process. The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag. After the game state reset process, the jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game. After that, the special operation status is set to "4". When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Specifically, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is controlled according to the opening pattern based on the round counter, and the round designation command and the ending command are set. Further, the V opening / closing member 39 is controlled in parallel with the opening of the first large winning opening 30. Furthermore, at the end of the jackpot, the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter are set.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 13: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). Special figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, the storage of the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 in the second special figure reserved storage area. If there is no such, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402). The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). In the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 9 and 10) is referred to, and the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) of the gaming machine 1 and the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) are held. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the number of balls. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area to the side read from the current position. At the same time as shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It shifts to the digested image display area side and is displayed as a reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area are 1 on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the storage of the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 in the first special figure reserved storage area. If there is no such, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408). The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). In the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 9 and 10) is referred to, and the game state (time saving state or non-time saving state) of the gaming machine 1 and the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S1408) are held. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the number of balls. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area by one to the side read from the current position. , The hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area is reserved. It shifts to the digested image display area side and is displayed as a reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the right among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area are 1 on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1412). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 8) of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (V). It is supposed to win the jackpot to pass).

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 14: steps S1402, S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is made based on the setting information stored in the setting information storage area 84g by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 7). (Step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reserved) is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since it is in a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the setting information (settings 1 to 6) by referring to the table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table T1. To do. For example, when the setting information is "setting 1", when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "936", it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is any other value, it is determined to be a loss.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 7) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the jackpot determination table T1 refers to the table for the normal probability state, and whether or not it is a jackpot based on the setting information (settings 1 to 6). Is determined. For example, when the setting information is "setting 1", when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "409", it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is any other value, it is determined to be a loss.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 8). After the jackpot type is determined, the information corresponding to the specified special figure stop symbol data is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the information corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the loss is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84, and this process is performed. finish.

8. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 23. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs an initialization process (step S4000). In the initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4001) and performs the random number update process (step S4002). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 6B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4003). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4004) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 16: step S4004). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4100). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4110). The variable effect in-process is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute a specific display effect. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4120). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output from the effect button 63. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4130). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4140), and ends this process. In other processing, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 17: step S4100). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4180). When receiving (step S4180: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4190). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and performs the look-ahead effect by referring to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93. Whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect are determined. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4180: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4200). When receiving (step S4200: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4210). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94c of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4100: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4230). When receiving (step S4230: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4240). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4230: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4250). When receiving (step S4250: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4260). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the effect symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4250: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4270). When receiving (step S4270: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4280). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 17: step S4130), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4270 (step S4270: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4290). When receiving (step S4290: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4300). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern corresponding to the special figure stop symbol and the number of rounds is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is sent to the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94. set. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4290 (step S4290: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4310). When receiving (step S4310: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4320). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4310: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a customer waiting standby command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4330). When receiving (step S4330: YES), the customer waiting effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4340). The “customer waiting effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an effect pattern (content) of a standby screen to be displayed when a predetermined waiting time elapses after the gaming machine 1 is no longer in operation. In the customer waiting effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the customer waiting standby command, and sets the information included in the customer waiting effect waiting command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the standby screen is selected, and the customer waiting standby command for starting the selected effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the customer waiting / waiting command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the customer waiting wait command has not been received (step S4330: NO), the above-mentioned customer waiting effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4350). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (whether it is a high probability state or not, whether it is a time saving state, or not, a probability change). The counter, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 18: step S4240). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S4400). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S4410). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable production is completed by superimposing an additional production such as a chance-up production on this core production.

The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93. When it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 94. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the sub RAM 94, the core effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is switched to the core effect pattern (look-ahead).

After determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S4420). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93. .. After determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 may further determine the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed by referring to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. Good.

After determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a setting suggestion effect pattern determination process (step S4430). The setting suggestion effect pattern determination process is a process of determining an effect pattern that suggests the setting information stored in the setting information storage area 84g. The setting information set in the setting information storage area 84g of the main RAM 84 is transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the initialization process of the main control main process (FIG. 11: step S001), and the initialization process of the sub control main process (FIG. 16). : When step S4000) is executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the information in the setting information storage area 94d of the sub RAM 94. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the setting suggestion effect counter, and determines the setting suggestion effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the setting suggestion effect pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S4400 to S4430 is realized ( Step S4440). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 17: step S4130), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S4450), and ends this process. The fluctuation effect timer is set with a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command.

9. About the first movable accessory The first movable accessory 14 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23.
In FIG. 20, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed. The change mode refers to a mode in which there is a change in emission color or the like. Specifically, it refers to a mode in which the parameters of hue, saturation, and lightness are changed. It can be said that the change mode is to excite the game as well as the effect on the display screen 7a by changing the color and brightness.

In FIG. 21, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is the light emitting mode. The extinguishing mode means a mode in which the light emitting unit 14a does not emit light. Specifically, it refers to an aspect in which power is not supplied to the light emitting unit 14a. When the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the lost mode, the light is turned off.
In FIG. 22, the first movable accessory 14 is in the advanced position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is the lighting mode. The first movable accessory 14 can move in parallel with the display screen 7a from the retracted position as shown by the arrow YG. Then, it is possible to stop at the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen 7a. The lighting mode refers to a mode in which the light emitting unit 14a emits light, but the parameters of hue, saturation, and brightness have not changed. As a result, the first movable accessory 14 can be used in place of the middle effect symbol 8C at the advance position, and can form a stop symbol array together with the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R.
In FIG. 23, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is the lighting mode. The lighting mode refers to a mode in which the light emitting unit 14a emits light, but the parameters of hue, saturation, and lightness do not change.

10. Production example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example) of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer). It is a production realized by 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The movable accessory effects A to F will be described below with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.
This movable accessory effect can be executed during a variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory effect, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Movable character production A]
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect A. The movable accessory effect A is an effect corresponding to the core effect patterns SP1 and SP2 of the jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV. Speaking of the fluctuation pattern, it corresponds to P1, P2, P21, P22, P41, P42, P61, and P62 (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect A, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach mode. The reach formation effect is such that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 24C, the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the ally character CRA appears on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "development" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (D), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, it will be a big hit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (E), the winning effect is executed. In the victory effect, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (F), the effect of aligning the character symbols is executed. The accessory symbol alignment effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 forms a stop symbol array together with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is a lighting mode, and the first movable accessory 14 functions not as a mere accessory but as a symbol used in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It can be seen that the maximum round of "16RV passing jackpot" is executed by executing this effect of matching the character symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". At this time, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position, but the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a maintains the lighting mode. The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Movable character production B]
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect B. The movable accessory effect B is an effect corresponding to the core effect pattern SP3 of the jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV. Speaking of fluctuation patterns, it corresponds to P3, P23, P43, and P63 (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect B, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach mode. The reach formation effect is such that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the ally character CRA appears on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "development" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (D), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, it will be a big hit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), the winning effect is executed. In the victory effect, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (F), a temporary stop effect (big hit) is executed. The temporary stop effect (big hit) is an effect that notifies that it is a big hit. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (G), the effect of aligning the character symbols is executed. The accessory symbol alignment effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 forms a stop symbol array together with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R on the display screen 7a. At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is a lighting mode, and the first movable accessory 14 functions not as a mere accessory but as a symbol used in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It can be seen that the maximum round of "16RV passing jackpot" is executed by executing this effect of matching the character symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (H), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". At this time, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position, but the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a maintains the lighting mode. The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Movable character production C]
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect C. The movable accessory effect C is an effect corresponding to the core effect patterns SP1, SP2, and SP3 of the 11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot. Speaking of the fluctuation pattern, it corresponds to P4, P5, P6, P44, P45, and P46 (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect C, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach mode. The reach formation effect is such that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 26C, the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the ally character CRA appears on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "development" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, it will be a big hit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (E), the winning effect is executed. In the victory effect, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG "victory" is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (F), a temporary stop effect (big hit) is executed. The temporary stop effect (big hit) is an effect that notifies that it is a big hit. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "5".
Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (G), the fixed stop effect (big hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (big hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the jackpot symbol arrangement. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "5". At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a of the first movable accessory 14 is turned off. From this, it can be seen that it is a "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing planned jackpot". The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Movable character production D]
FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect D. The movable accessory effect D is an effect corresponding to the core effect patterns SP1, SP2, and SP3 that are lost. Speaking of fluctuation patterns, it corresponds to P8, P9, P10, P12, P13, P14, P25, P26, P27, P29, P30, P31, P48, P49, P50, P52, P53, P54, P65, P66, P67. (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect D, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach mode. The reach formation effect is such that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development production is a production that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, the ally character CRA appears on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "development" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, it will be a big hit.
Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (E), the defeat effect is executed. In the defeat effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed, and the message image MSG "defeat" is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (F), a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (loss) is an effect of notifying that the effect is a loss. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "6".
Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (G), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the lost symbols. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "6". At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a of the first movable accessory 14 is turned off. The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Movable character production E]
FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect E. Movable accessory production E is a production corresponding to the core production pattern "normal reach" of loss. Speaking of fluctuation patterns, it corresponds to P7, P11, P24, P28, P47, P51, P64, and P68 (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect E, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a reach mode. The reach formation effect is such that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 28C, a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (loss) is an effect of notifying that the effect is a loss. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "6".
Next, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the lost symbols. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "6". At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a of the first movable accessory 14 is turned off. The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Movable character production F]
FIG. 29 is a diagram for explaining the movable accessory effect F. The movable accessory effect F is an effect corresponding to the core effect pattern of loss, "loss without reach". Speaking of the fluctuation pattern, it corresponds to P15, P16, P32, P33, P55, P56, P72, P73 (FIGS. 9 and 10).

First, in the movable accessory effect F, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), the variation start effect is executed. In this fluctuation start effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change at high speed. The reserved image 9A and the reserved image 9C are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is in the retracted position, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a is changed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29B, the left and right symbol stop effect is executed. The left and right symbol stop effect is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops at "1" and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 29C, a temporary stop effect (loss) is executed. The temporary stop effect (loss) is an effect of notifying that the effect is a loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "2", and the right effect symbol 8R is "8".
Next, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the lost symbols. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is "1", the middle effect symbol 8C is "2", and the right effect symbol 8R is "8". At this time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 14a of the first movable accessory 14 is turned off. The reserved image corresponding to the fluctuation disappears almost at the same time as the fixed stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs various effects using a display screen is common (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-098071). In such a game machine, whether or not it is a big hit is produced by using a video or a character, so that the normal game can be made highly interesting. However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable accessory effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the stop display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first movable accessory 14 is used in place of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the display screen. A stop symbol array is formed together with the effect symbols 8L and 8R of 7a (FIGS. 24 (F) and 25 (G)). According to this configuration, since the accessory functions as a symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position to form a stop symbol array together with the effect symbols 8L and 8R of the display screen 7a (FIG. 24 (F)). FIG. 25 (G). According to this configuration, since the accessory moves and the stop symbol arrangement is formed, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 has the same design as the “7” symbol of the effect symbol, and when the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are “7”, A stop symbol array is formed together with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R (FIGS. 24 (F) and 25 (G)). According to this configuration, the first movable accessory 14 can be further functioned as a symbol, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stop symbol arrangement configured by using the first movable accessory 14 determines the transition to the jackpot. According to this configuration, the player can have a sense of superiority, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the stop symbol array is formed by using the first movable accessory 14, it is determined that the maximum round is the "16RV passing jackpot". According to this configuration, the player can have a sense of superiority, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 has a light emitting unit 14a, and it is possible to change the light emitting mode. Then, when the stop symbol array is formed together with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the lighting mode has a fixed hue, lightness, and saturation (FIGS. 24 (F) and 25 (G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the first movable accessory 14 is recognized as one symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 has a light emitting unit 14a, and it is possible to change the light emitting mode. Then, in the fluctuation in which the winning result is lost, the light emitting unit 14a is not emitted when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped (FIGS. 27 (G), 28 (D), and 29. (D). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the first movable accessory 14 can be recognized as a symbol only when necessary, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
An example of the effect of the movable accessory effect is shown below.
In the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 is modeled after the "7" symbol, but it may be modeled after a special effect symbol that does not appear in normal fluctuations. Then, in the effect of aligning the accessory symbols, the first movable accessory 14 may form a stop symbol array together with the special effect symbol.
For example, when the symbols "1 to 9" are used for normal fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), the two-digit number "13", which is not used for normal fluctuations, is used as a special effect symbol. Along with the symbols 8L and 8R, the first movable accessory 14 in the shape of the "13" symbol may form a stop symbol array.
For example, when the symbols "1 to 9" are used for the normal fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the "predetermined character" that is not used for the normal fluctuation is set as a special effect symbol, and the effect symbol 8L, Along with 8R, the first movable accessory 14 in the shape of a "predetermined character" may form a stop symbol array.
For example, when the symbols "1 to 9" are used for normal fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 30 (C), the character "MAX", which is not used for normal fluctuation, is used as a special effect symbol, and the effect symbol 8L. , 8R, and the first movable accessory 14 in the shape of the character "MAX" may form a stop symbol array.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect 1]
A display device that can display the production design and
It is a gaming machine equipped with a movable accessory,
In the stop display of the effect symbol performed by the display device, the movable accessory is used in place of the effect symbol in a predetermined row, and an accessory symbol effect that forms a stop symbol array together with the effect symbol in the display device is executed. It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 2]
The gaming machine according to the first aspect.
In the accessory symbol effect, the movable accessory moves from the retracted position to the advance position and stops at the advance position to form the stop symbol array.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 3]
The gaming machine according to aspect 1 or aspect 2.
The movable accessory is an accessory having a design similar to that of a specific effect symbol among the effect symbols.
In the accessory symbol effect, the stop symbol array is formed together with the specific effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3.
The character symbol effect is an effect of stopping the confirmation of the effect symbol to notify the confirmation of the transition to the jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 5]
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
The accessory symbol effect is an effect of notifying the determination of transition to a specific jackpot game when there are a plurality of types of the jackpot game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5.
The movable accessory has a light emitting portion capable of changing the light emitting mode.
In the accessory design effect, the movable accessory retains one light emitting mode without changing the light emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect 7]
The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect.
When the accessory symbol effect is not executed in the fixed stop display of the effect symbol, the movable accessory is turned off as the light emitting mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The maximum round promotion effects A to M will be described below with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. In FIGS. 31 to 43, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and a plurality of effect symbols (3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the production designs) are also omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The production symbol is composed of various character symbols with numerical symbols (numbers "1" to "9", Roman numerals "X"), and is displayed in a large size mainly with the character symbols, and is the size of the character symbols. It is smaller in size and has a number pattern.

When multiple production symbols (three production symbols) are aligned with the same production symbol, a jackpot game (big hit production) that gives a profit to the player occurs, and a specific number "X" is used for a specific character symbol. If a specific effect symbol with a symbol is aligned, a jackpot game (big hit effect) with the maximum round will occur, and a number symbol of numbers "1" to "9" will be added to the character symbol different from the specific character symbol. If the effect symbols with any of the above (that is, the effect symbols different from the specific effect symbols) are aligned, a jackpot game (big hit effect) having a normal round will occur.

The specific effect symbol is divinely colored in gold (yellow), which is a specific color in both the specific character symbol and the specific number symbol "X". On the other hand, the effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol is colored blue, which is a normal color different from the specific color, in which the character symbol different from the specific character symbol and the number symbols "1" to "9" are both different from the specific color. ing. In addition, among the effect symbols different from the specific effect symbol, the character symbol different from the specific character symbol and the odd number (that is, the number "1", the number "3", the number "5", the number "7" and the number "9" ”) Number symbols are colored red, which is a normal color for odd numbers different from the specific color, and character symbols different from the specific character symbols and even numbers (that is, numbers“ 2 ”, numbers“ 4 ”, numbers“ 6 ”” And the number pattern of the number "8") may be colored in blue, which is a normal color for even numbers different from the specific color.

When a big hit game (big hit effect) having a normal round occurs, it is possible to obtain a ball by digesting, for example, 11 rounds as a normal round. On the other hand, when a big hit having a maximum round (big hit effect) occurs, it is possible to obtain a ball by digesting 16 rounds, which is 5 rounds more than a normal round, for example. Therefore, after the jackpot is confirmed, the maximum round promotion effect, which is the promotion effect of the number of rounds, is executed as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round.

The jackpot having the maximum round (big hit effect) is the "16RV passing jackpot" shown in FIG. 8, and the maximum round is "16 rounds". Further, the jackpot game having a normal round (big hit effect) is "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" shown in FIG. 8, and the normal round is "11 rounds (substantially 10 rounds)".

As a production symbol that can generate a jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round, in addition to a specific production symbol in which a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" is attached to a specific character symbol, a specific production symbol is used. Only the character symbol is replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol for the production symbol different from the production symbol, and only the number symbol is the Roman numeral "X" for the production symbol different from the specific production symbol. Examples include those that replace (switch, replace) with, and those that replace (switch, replace) only the number symbols from the normal color to the specific color for the effect symbols that are different from the specific effect symbols.

In the maximum round promotion effect, after the variable display of the three effect symbols is started and the effect that the effect symbols are aligned to the same symbol to convey the occurrence of the jackpot is executed, the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the normal round is started to the maximum round Tell the player whether or not it is possible to promote (promote the number of rounds) to a jackpot game (big hit production) that has. As a result, the player can obtain a chance to acquire a jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round by the maximum round promotion effect.

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable effect start command), and when an instruction to execute the maximum round promotion effect is included, the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. Is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, the maximum round promotion effect A is first explained, and the maximum round promotion effect B, the maximum round promotion effect C, the maximum round promotion effect D, the maximum round promotion effect E, the maximum round promotion effect F, the maximum round promotion effect G, and the maximum. The round promotion effect H, the maximum round promotion effect I, the maximum round promotion effect J, the maximum round promotion effect K, the maximum round promotion effect L, and the maximum round promotion effect M will be described in order.

[Maximum round promotion production A]
First, the maximum round promotion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect A. First, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 31 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 31 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 31C, the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect A is started, as shown in FIGS. 31 (D) to 31 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 31 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "3" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. This character symbol is different from the character symbol with the number "4" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 31 (C).

In FIG. 31 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "3", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "3". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "3" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 31 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "3").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (G), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 31 (H), FIG. 31 (F), The character symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in (G) are the same, and the number symbol is replaced (switched, scraped) from the number "3" to the Roman numeral "X". Instead), then stop is displayed.

In FIG. 31 (H), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched) from the number "3" to the Roman numeral "X". , Will be replaced).

This Roman numeral "X" is a specific number attached to a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that determines promotion of the number of rounds. It is a design. That is, in FIG. 31 (H), only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the specific Roman numerals "X" attached to the specific character symbols that determine the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a number pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 31 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 31 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect A), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form doublets, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect A is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number symbol "3" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion effect is produced. By A, only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced (switched) with the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. , Replacing). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect A. Opportunities for promotion of numbers (that is, "16RV scheduled jackpot") can be obtained. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production B]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 32 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 32 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 32 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect B is started, as shown in FIGS. 32 (D) to 32 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 32 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 32 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 32 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 32 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 32 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 32 (G), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 32 (H), FIG. 32 (F), The character symbol of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in (G) and the number symbol of the number "4" are the same, and the number symbol of this number "4" is normal. The color (for example, blue) is replaced with a specific color (the color of the specific number symbol "X" that determines the promotion of the number of rounds), and then the display is stopped. That is, in FIG. 32 (H), only the color of the numerical symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is replaced (switched or replaced) from the normal color to the specific color.

In FIG. 32 (H), the color of the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the color of the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the color of the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced from normal colors to specific colors ( Switch, switch).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 32 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 32 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect B), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form doublets, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect B is started, and then the maximum round promotion is performed even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned again with the number "4" and temporarily stopped. By the effect B, only the color of the number symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is replaced (switched or replaced) from the normal color to the specific color. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect B. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production C]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 33 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 33 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 33C, the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect C is started, as shown in FIGS. 33 (D) to 33 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variation display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 33 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "5" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. This character symbol is different from the character symbol with the number "4" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 33 (C).

In FIG. 33 (G), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "5". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "5" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 33 (G), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "5").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33 (H), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (I), FIG. 33 (G), In (H), the number symbols "5" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped are the same, and the character symbol is replaced (switched, replaced) with a specific character symbol. ), Then the stop is displayed.

In FIG. 33 (I), the character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol.

This specific character symbol has a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific number symbol "X" in the specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. It is a specific character symbol that has been created. That is, in FIG. 33 (I), only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are attached with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a character pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 33 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 33 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4" attached, become the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a zorome, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect C is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number symbol "5" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion effect is produced. By C, only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced (switched) with a specific character symbol with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. , Will be replaced). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect C. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production D]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect D. First, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 34 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 34 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 34 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect D is started, as shown in FIGS. 34 (D) to 34 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 34 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 34 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 34 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 34 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 34 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34 (G), the character symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 34 (F) are the same, and the number symbols are numbers. The number "4" is replaced with the Roman numeral "X" (switching, switching), and then the stop display is displayed.

In FIG. 34 (G), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched) from the number "4" to the Roman numeral "X". , Will be replaced).

This Roman numeral "X" is a specific number attached to a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that determines promotion of the number of rounds. It is a design. That is, in FIG. 34 (G), only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the specific Roman numerals "X" attached to the specific character symbols that determine the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a number pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 34 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 34 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4" attached, become the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form doublets, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect D is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned again with the number "4" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion is performed. By the effect D, only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced with the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds ( It is designed to switch, switch). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect D. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production E]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect E will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect E. First, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 35 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 35 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 35 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect E is started, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) to 35 (E), as a chance to acquire a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, the left effect symbol 8L, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 35 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 35 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 35 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 35 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 35 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (G), the number "4" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 35 (F) are the same. , The character symbol is replaced (switched, replaced) with a specific character symbol, and then the stop display is displayed.

In FIG. 35 (G), the character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol.

This specific character symbol has a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific number symbol "X" in the specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. It is a specific character symbol that has been created. That is, in FIG. 35 (G), only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are attached with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a character pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 35 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbol "9" that becomes the first stage) or a specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific numeric symbol "X" that is attached to a specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 35 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect E), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a zorome, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect E is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number symbol "5" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion effect is produced. By E, only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced (switched) with a specific character symbol with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. , Will be replaced). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds is one (that is, one previous stage) effect symbol (that is, one previous stage). Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect E. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production F]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect F will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect F. First, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with numbers "1" to "9" and Roman numerals "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 36 (A) is started, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the ally character CRA is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRB is arranged and displayed, and further, in the center of the display screen 7a, two message MGs "A ally character wins a big hit !!" are arranged and displayed in front of the characters CRA and CRB. Action production (battle production) by two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started).

In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character CRB finally wins the ally character CRA (that is, when the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB), it is lost.

Subsequently, the action production (battle production) is developed (started), and as shown in FIG. 36 (C), at the end of the action production (battle production), here, a production that notifies the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. It is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 36 (D), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 36 (D), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect F is started, as shown in FIGS. 36 (E) to 36 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 36 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "3" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. This character symbol is different from the character symbol with the number "4" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 36 (D).

In FIG. 36 (G), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "3", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "3". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "3" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 36 (G), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "3").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 36 (H), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 36 (I), FIG. 36 (G), The character symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in (H) are the same, and the number symbol is replaced (switched, scraped) from the number "3" to the Roman numeral "X". Instead), then stop is displayed.

In FIG. 36 (I), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched) from the number "3" to the Roman numeral "X". , Will be replaced).

This Roman numeral "X" is a specific number attached to a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that determines promotion of the number of rounds. It is a design. That is, in FIG. 36 (I), only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the specific Roman numerals "X" attached to the specific character symbols that determine the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a number pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 36 (D), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 36 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form doublets, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect F is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number symbol "3" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion effect is produced. By F, only the number symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced (switched) with the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. , Replacing). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect F. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production G]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect G will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect G. First, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 37 (A) is started, as shown in FIG. 37 (B), the ally character CRA is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRB is arranged and displayed, and further, in the center of the display screen 7a, two message MGs "A ally character wins a big hit !!" are arranged and displayed in front of the characters CRA and CRB. Action production (battle production) by two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started).

In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character CRB finally wins the ally character CRA (that is, when the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB), it is lost.

Subsequently, the action production (battle production) is developed (started), and as shown in FIG. 37 (C), at the end of the action production (battle production), here, a production that notifies the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. It is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 37 (D), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 37 (D), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect G is started, as shown in FIGS. 37 (E) to 37 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 37 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 37 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 37 (D). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 37 (G), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 37 (G), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (H), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 37 (I), FIG. 37 (G), In (H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped are maintained as they are, and then stopped and displayed. That is, the promotion of the number of rounds could not be obtained in the maximum round promotion production G.

In FIG. 37 (I), the character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are other character symbols (including the above-mentioned specific character symbol). The number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle production symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right production symbol 8R are not replaced (not switched or replaced) at all. It does not replace numbers or Roman numbers "X" at all (does not switch, does not replace).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 37 (D), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbol "9" that becomes the first stage) or a specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific numeric symbol "X" that is attached to a specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 37 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4" attached, become the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a temporary stop display. Then, the maximum round promotion effect G is started, and then the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned again with the number "4" and temporarily stopped, that is, the round. Even if a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol called the Roman number "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that confirms the promotion of the number is aligned and a zorome is formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, further A specific production symbol (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman number "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, one previous stage) production symbol (number "9") ) And one after (that is, one after) production symbols (number "1") are aligned and a zorome is formed and a temporary stop is not displayed, but the player is promoted to the number of rounds by the maximum round promotion production G. You can get the opportunity. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production H]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect H will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect H. First, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 38 (A) is started, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the ally character CRA is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRB is arranged and displayed, and further, in the center of the display screen 7a, two message MGs "A ally character wins a big hit !!" are arranged and displayed in front of the characters CRA and CRB. Action production (battle production) by two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started).

In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character CRB finally wins the ally character CRA (that is, when the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB), it is lost.

Subsequently, the action production (battle production) is developed (started), and as shown in FIG. 38 (C), at the end of the action production (battle production), here, a production that notifies the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. It is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 38 (D), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 38 (D), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect H is started, as shown in FIGS. 38 (E) to 38 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 38 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 38 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 38 (D). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 38 (G), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 38 (G), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38 (H), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 38 (I), FIG. 38 (G), The character symbol of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in (H) and the number symbol of the number "4" are the same, and the number symbol of this number "4" is normal. The color (for example, blue) is replaced with a specific color (the color of the specific number symbol "X" that determines the promotion of the number of rounds), and then the display is stopped. That is, in FIG. 38 (I), only the color of the numerical symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is replaced (switched or replaced) from the normal color to the specific color.

In FIG. 38 (I), the color of the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the color of the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the color of the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced from normal colors to specific colors ( Switch, switch).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 38 (D), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 38 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form doublets, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect H is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned again with the number "4" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion is performed. By the effect H, only the color of the number symbol in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is replaced (switched or replaced) from the normal color to the specific color. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect H. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production I]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect I will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect I. First, as shown in FIG. 39 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 39 (A) is started, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the ally character CRA is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The character CRB is arranged and displayed, and further, in the center of the display screen 7a, two message MGs "A ally character wins a big hit !!" are arranged and displayed in front of the characters CRA and CRB. Action production (battle production) by two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started).

In the action production (battle production), a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is fought, and when the ally character CRA finally wins the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the enemy character CRB finally wins the ally character CRA (that is, when the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB), it is lost.

Subsequently, the action production (battle production) is developed (started), and as shown in FIG. 39 (C), at the end of the action production (battle production), here, a production that notifies the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. It is performed, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (D), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 39 (D), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 39 (D), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect I is started, as shown in FIGS. 39 (E) to 39 (G), as a chance to acquire a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, the left effect symbol 8L, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 39 (H), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "5" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. This character symbol is different from the character symbol with the number "4" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 39 (D).

In FIG. 39 (H), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "5". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "5" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 39 (H), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "5").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 39 (I), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is located on the lower center side of the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are arranged on the front side and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode (here, blinking red). The English word "PUSH" is engraved on the part of the effect button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the effect button 63. The effect button image BTN is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image prompting the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63 in small steps in the vertical direction so as to overlap the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlaps the lower part of the front surface thereof. As described above, the timer bar TB indicating the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 is displayed.

In addition, as a "predetermined light emitting mode", for example, white blinking → based on a variable effect start command including information on the acquisition expectation degree (promotion degree of the number of rounds) of the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. Blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold (blinking yellow) → blinking seven colors (blinking rainbow (promotion of the number of rounds)) Promotion expectation) is set high.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 63 elapses, as shown in FIG. 39 (J), FIG. 39 (H), In (I), the number "5" of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed are the same, and the character symbol is replaced (switched, replaced) with a specific character symbol. ), Then the stop is displayed.

In FIG. 39 (J), the character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are all replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol.

This specific character symbol has a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific number symbol "X" in the specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. It is a specific character symbol that has been created. That is, in FIG. 39 (J), only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are attached with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. Replaces with a character pattern (switches, switches).

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 39 (D), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 39 (D), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a zorome, and a temporary stop display is displayed. Then, the maximum round promotion effect I is started, and after that, even if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number symbol "5" and temporarily stopped, the maximum round promotion effect is produced. By I, only the character symbols in the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are replaced (switched) with a specific character symbol with a specific number symbol "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. , Will be replaced). As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol (that is, the one before) of a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol of the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the previous stage) Even if the number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the Zoro eyes are formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player is rounded by the maximum round promotion effect I. You are now able to get the opportunity to promote numbers. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production J]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect J will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect J. First, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 40 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 40 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 40 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect J is started, as shown in FIGS. 40 (D) to 40 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

When the maximum round promotion effect J is started, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the character symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same, but the number symbols are numbers. It is replaced (switched, replaced) with the Roman numeral "X" in a specific production symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round, and is changed. That is, the number "5" that is one after (that is, one after) the number symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 40 (C) is originally. Although it was attached to the character symbol, when the maximum round promotion effect J is started, a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) with the maximum round from the number "5" is accompanied by this. When the player visually recognizes this Roman numeral "X" by replacing (switching, replacing) with the Roman numeral "X" in, the expectation is that a jackpot game (big hit production) with the maximum round will be acquired. Can be enhanced for players.

This Roman numeral "X" is a specific number attached to a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that determines promotion of the number of rounds. It is a design. That is, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the number symbols of the number "5" originally attached to the character symbol, have the number of rounds only for the number symbols in FIG. It replaces (switches, switches) with a specific number symbol called the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol that confirms promotion.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 40 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 40 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 40 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 40 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 40 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 40 (F) fall (slide downward) to this. Along with this, the above-mentioned number symbol, which is one after (that is, one after), has been replaced (switched, replaced) from the number "5" to the Roman numeral "X". The right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and then stopped.

If the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 40 (F) do not fall (do not slide downward) and then stop and are displayed, the maximum round is promoted. It will not be possible to obtain promotion of the number of rounds in production J.

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 40 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 40 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a temporary stop display. Then, when the maximum round promotion effect J is started and the re-variation is started, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are composed by adding the number "4" to the character symbol. 8C, right effect symbol 8R, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is configured by adding the number symbol of the number "5" to the character symbol, which is one after (that is, one after). For the right production symbol 8R, only the number symbol of the number "5" will be replaced (switched, replaced) with the specific number symbol of the Roman number "X" attached to the specific character symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. It has become. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol immediately before (that is, the previous stage) of the specific production symbol (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. Even if (number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the zorome is formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player can be promoted to the maximum round by the promotion effect J. You will be able to get the opportunity to promote the number of rounds. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production K]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect K will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect K. First, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 41 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). (Temporarily stopped at the number "4"), the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 41 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 41 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect K is started, as shown in FIGS. 41 (D) to 41 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

When the maximum round promotion effect K is started, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), the character symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same, but the number symbols are numbers. It is replaced (switched, replaced) with the Roman numeral "X" in a specific production symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round, and is changed. That is, the number "3" that is one before (that is, one before) the number symbols of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 41 (C) is originally. Although it was attached to the character symbol, when the maximum round promotion effect K is started, a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) with the maximum round from the number "3" is accompanied by this. When the player visually recognizes this Roman numeral "X" by replacing (switching, replacing) with the Roman numeral "X" in, the expectation is that a jackpot game (big hit production) with the maximum round will be acquired. Can be enhanced for players.

This Roman numeral "X" is a specific number attached to a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that determines promotion of the number of rounds. It is a design. That is, in FIG. 41 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the number symbols of the number "3" originally attached to the character symbol, have the number of rounds only for the number symbols. It replaces (switches, switches) with a specific number symbol called the Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol that confirms promotion.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 41 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 41 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 41 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 41 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 41 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 41 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 41 (F) rise (jump up, jump up, slide upward). ), Along with this, the above-mentioned number symbol, which is one before (that is, one before), has been replaced (switched, replaced) from the number "3" to the Roman numeral "X". The effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R rise (jump up, jump up, slide upward), and a temporary stop display is displayed, and then a stop display is displayed.

The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped in FIG. 41 (F) do not rise (do not jump up, do not jump up, do not slide upward), and then stop and display. Then, the promotion of the number of rounds cannot be obtained in the maximum round promotion effect K.

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 41 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbol "9" that becomes the first stage) or a specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific numeric symbol "X" that is attached to a specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 41 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4" attached, become the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect K), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a temporary stop display. Then, when the maximum round promotion effect K is started and the re-variation is started, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are configured by adding the number "4" to the character symbol. 8C, right effect symbol 8R, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is one before (that is, one previous stage), and is composed of the character symbol originally with the number "3". For the right production symbol 8R, only the number symbol of the number "3" will be replaced (switched, replaced) with the specific number symbol of the Roman number "X" attached to the specific character symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. It has become. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol immediately before (that is, the previous stage) of the specific production symbol (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. Even if (number "9") and the production pattern (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and the zorome is formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player can be promoted to the maximum round by the promotion effect K. You will be able to get the opportunity to promote the number of rounds. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production L]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect L will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect L. First, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 42 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 42 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 42 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 42 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect L is started, as shown in FIGS. 42 (D) to 42 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

When the maximum round promotion effect L is started, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), the number “5” of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same. , The character symbol is replaced (switched, replaced) with a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, the left effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 42 (C). Although the number symbol "5", which is one (that is, one after) the number symbol of the symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R, was originally attached to the character symbol, the maximum round promotion production L When is started, the character symbol originally attached with the number symbol of the number "5" is replaced with a specific character symbol in the specific effect symbol that generates the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. When the player visually recognizes this specific character symbol by (switching, switching) and re-variating, it is possible to raise the expectation for the player to acquire the jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round. it can.

This specific character symbol has a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific number symbol "X" in the specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. It is a specific character symbol that has been created. That is, in FIG. 42 (D), only the character symbol has the number of rounds of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the number "5" originally attached to the character symbol. It replaces (switches, switches) with a specific character symbol with a specific numeric symbol "X" that confirms promotion.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 42 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 42 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 42 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 42 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 42 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 42 (F) fall (slide downward) to this. Along with this, the above-mentioned character symbol, which is one later (that is, one later), has been replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R (here). Then, the number "5") is temporarily stopped and then stopped.

In addition, when the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped in FIG. 42 (F) do not fall (do not slide downward), and then stop is displayed, the maximum round is promoted. It means that the promotion of the number of rounds cannot be obtained in the production L.

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 42 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbol "9" that becomes the first stage) or a specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific numeric symbol "X" that is attached to a specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 42 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4" attached, become the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect L), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a temporary stop display. Then, when the maximum round promotion effect L is started and the re-variation is started, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are configured by adding the number "4" to the character symbol. 8C, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol originally with the number "5", which is one after (that is, one after) with respect to the right effect symbol 8R. For the right effect symbol 8R, only the character symbol is replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol with the Roman number "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol immediately before (that is, the previous stage) of the specific production symbol (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. Even if (number "9") and the production symbol (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and a zorome is formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player can be promoted to the maximum round by the maximum round promotion effect L. You will be able to get the opportunity to promote the number of rounds. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Maximum round promotion production M]
Next, the maximum round promotion effect M will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the maximum round promotion effect M. First, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. Fluctuations in the effect symbols (various character symbols are added with the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. The display starts. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 43 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (number) (here). Then, the number "4" temporarily stops), and the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), doublets are formed on the display screen 7a by aligning the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R (here, the number "4"). The message MG "Big hit!" Is displayed above the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are in a state of slowly moving in small steps in the vertical direction, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 43 (C), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 43 (C), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, when the maximum round promotion effect M is started, as shown in FIGS. 43 (D) to 43 (E), the left effect symbol 8L, as a chance to acquire the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R start re-variation in a state where doublets are formed. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the position where the temporary stop is displayed with the doublets formed toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The number "5" attached to the character symbol following the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are displayed in a variable manner and consist of the number "4" attached to the character symbol. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R composed of numerical symbols appear from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R have doublets one after another. The display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a in the formed state is varied. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are changed in an opaque state.

When the maximum round promotion effect M is started, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), the number “3” of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same. , The character symbol is replaced (switched, replaced) with a specific character symbol in a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, the left effect that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 43 (C). Although the number symbol "3", which is one before (that is, one before) the number symbol of the symbol 8L, the middle production symbol 8C, and the right production symbol 8R, was originally attached to the character symbol, the maximum round promotion production M When is started, the character symbol originally attached with the number symbol of the number "3" is replaced with a specific character symbol in the specific effect symbol that generates the jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round. When the player visually recognizes this specific character symbol by (switching, switching) and re-variating, it is possible to raise the expectation for the player to acquire the jackpot game (big hit production) having the maximum round. it can.

This specific character symbol has a specific effect symbol that generates a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round, that is, a specific number symbol "X" in the specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. It is a specific character symbol that has been created. That is, in FIG. 43 (E), only the character symbol has the number of rounds of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the number "3" originally attached to the character symbol. It replaces (switches, switches) with a specific character symbol with a specific numeric symbol "X" that confirms promotion.

Subsequently, the variable display is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 43 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the same symbols and the numbers "4" are attached to the character symbols. Temporary stop is displayed with a symbol. That is, in FIG. 43 (F), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 43 (C). Temporary stop is displayed with the same symbol.

In FIG. 43 (F), the left effect symbol 8L has the character symbol 8La attached with the number symbol 8Lb of the number "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C has the character symbol 8Ca attached with the number symbol 8Cb of the number "4". In the right effect symbol 8R, the number symbol 8Rb of the number "4" is attached to the character symbol 8Ra. The character symbol 8La of the left effect symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Ca of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Ra of the right effect symbol 8R are the same character symbol. Further, in FIG. 43 (F), the number symbol 8Lb of the left effect symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Cb of the middle effect symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Rb of the right effect symbol 8R are the same number symbols (number "4").

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 43 (G), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 43 (F) rise (jump up, jump up, slide upward). ), Along with this, the above-mentioned character symbol, which is one previous (that is, one previous stage), has been replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect. The symbol 8R (here, the number "3") rises (jumps up, jumps up, slides upward), and a temporary stop display is displayed, and then a stop display is displayed.

The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped in FIG. 43 (F) do not rise (do not jump up, do not jump up, do not slide upward), and then stop and display. Then, the promotion of the number of rounds cannot be obtained in the maximum round promotion effect M.

In this way, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed in such a manner that the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variable display of the numbers "1" to "9" and the Roman numeral "X" is added to various character symbols) has started. Therefore, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number. The display mode is such that the reel is rotated in the order of "7"-> number "8"-> number "9"-> Roman number "X"-> number "1"-> number "2"->. Then, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed at the start of the maximum round promotion effect, are one before (that is, one before) the number symbols. ), The same number symbol, and the number symbol one after (that is, one after). Therefore, in FIG. 43 (C), one before (that is, one) a specific effect symbol (that is, a specific number symbol "X" attached to a specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. One of the number symbols "9" that will be the first stage) or the specific production symbol that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol). If the number symbols of the number "1", which is the latter (that is, one later), do not form a uniform Zoro, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV planned jackpot") cannot be obtained. Although the jackpot game (big hit production) occurred after that, the player was not obediently pleased (had to be discouraged).

That is, in the maximum round promotion effect in the prior art, in FIG. 43 (C), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number “4” to form a zorome and temporarily stop. When displayed, the character symbol is one before (that is, one before) the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are composed of the character symbol with the number "4". The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are composed by attaching the number symbol of the number "3", and the left is composed by further attaching the number symbol of the number "4" to the character symbol. Left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is composed of the character symbol with the number "5" one after (that is, one after) of the effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R. Since the right production symbol is 8R, the opportunity to promote the number of rounds (that is, "16RV passing jackpot") cannot be obtained, and the jackpot game (big hit production) occurs after that, but the player is obedient. I wasn't happy (I had to be discouraged).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment (maximum round promotion effect M), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the number "4" to form a temporary stop display. Then, when the maximum round promotion effect M is started and the re-variation is started, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol are configured by adding the number "4" to the character symbol. 8C, right effect symbol 8R, left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, which is one before (that is, one previous stage), and is composed of the character symbol originally with the number "3". For the right effect symbol 8R, only the character symbol is replaced (switched or replaced) with a specific character symbol with the Roman number "X" that confirms the promotion of the number of rounds. As a result, a specific effect symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds (that is, a specific number symbol with the Roman numeral "X" attached to the specific character symbol) is aligned and a zorome is formed, and the temporary stop is not displayed. In addition, the production symbol immediately before (that is, the previous stage) of the specific production symbol (that is, the specific number symbol "X" attached to the specific character symbol) that determines the promotion of the number of rounds. Even if (number "9") and the production symbol (number "1") one after (that is, one after) are aligned and a zorome is formed and the temporary stop is not displayed, the player can be promoted to the maximum round by the promotion effect M. You will be able to get the opportunity to promote the number of rounds. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the maximum round promotion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 31 (D) to 135 (H) of the maximum round promotion effect A, a plurality of types of effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right). It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) that displays the effect symbol 8R), and is a specific hit game among a plurality of types of hit games ("16RV passing jackpot", "11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot"). It is different from the specific production symbol (the production symbol in which the specific number symbol "X" is attached to the specific character symbol) that notifies the confirmation of the transition to ("16RV scheduled jackpot") and the specific production symbol. It has other production symbols (effect symbols with numbers "1" to "9" added to the character design), and some of the other production symbols (left production design 8L, middle production design 8C, right production). The symbol 8R replaces the number "3" number symbol) with a part of a specific production symbol (a specific number symbol named Roman numeral "X" attached to a specific character symbol) and displays it for a specific winning game. The first effect of notifying the transition confirmation can be executed. According to this configuration, even if a specific effect symbol is not displayed, a part of the other effect symbol is replaced with a part of the specific effect symbol and displayed to notify the confirmation of the transition to the specific winning game. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Maximum round promotion effect B of FIGS. 32 (D) to 32 (H), maximum round promotion effect C of FIGS. 33 (D) to 33 (I), maximum round of FIGS. 34 (D) to 34 (G). Promotion effect D, maximum round promotion effect E in FIGS. 35 (D) to 35 (G), maximum round promotion effect F in FIGS. 36 (E) to 36 (I), FIGS. 37 (E) to 37 (I) ) Maximum round promotion effect G, maximum round promotion effect H in FIGS. 38 (E) to 38 (I), maximum round promotion effect I in FIGS. 39 (E) to 39 (J), and FIG. 40 (D). Maximum round promotion effect J in FIGS. 40 (G), maximum round promotion effect K in FIGS. 41 (D) to 41 (G), maximum round promotion effect L in FIGS. 42 (D) to 42 (G), and FIG. 43. The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect M of (D) to FIG. 43 (G).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (C) of the maximum round promotion effect A, a plurality of types are used before the first effect (FIGS. 31 (D) to (H)) is executed. A second effect (design) that notifies the advance notice of the transition to another hit game ("11R (substantially 10R) V non-passing jackpot") that is different from the specific hit game ("16RV scheduled jackpot"). 8L, middle production symbol 8C, right production symbol 8R are the same symbols (here, number "4") are aligned and doublet is formed, and the message MG of "big hit!" Is left production symbol 8L, middle production symbol 8C, right. It is displayed above the effect symbol 8R.) Can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the player feels disappointed instead of the specific winning game when notifying the advance notice of the transition to another winning game different from the specific winning game, the other winning games are subsequently announced. It is possible to perform the first effect of replacing a part of the effect symbol with a part of the specific effect symbol and displaying it to notify the confirmation of the transition to the specific hit game. As a result, it is possible to raise expectations for a specific hit from the player.
Maximum round promotion effect B of FIGS. 32 (D) to 32 (H), maximum round promotion effect C of FIGS. 33 (D) to 33 (I), maximum round of FIGS. 34 (D) to 34 (G). Promotion effect D, maximum round promotion effect E in FIGS. 35 (D) to 35 (G), maximum round promotion effect F in FIGS. 36 (E) to 36 (I), FIGS. 37 (E) to 37 (I) ) Maximum round promotion effect G, maximum round promotion effect H in FIGS. 38 (E) to 38 (I), maximum round promotion effect I in FIGS. 39 (E) to 39 (J), and FIG. 40 (D). Maximum round promotion effect J in FIGS. 40 (G), maximum round promotion effect K in FIGS. 41 (D) to 41 (G), maximum round promotion effect L in FIGS. 42 (D) to 42 (G), and FIG. 43. The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect M of (D) to FIG. 43 (G).

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes, for example, an effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 31 (G) of the maximum round promotion effect A, and the effect button 63 (operation means). The first effect can be executed based on the operation of. According to this configuration, even if a specific effect symbol is not displayed, when the player operates the effect button 63 (operation means), a part of the other effect symbol is replaced with a part of the specific effect symbol and displayed. Since it is possible to execute the first effect of notifying the confirmation of the transition to a specific hit game (“16 RV passing jackpot”), the player can perform a specific hit by his / her own voluntary operation. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment that attracts the game.
Maximum round promotion effect B in FIG. 32 (G), maximum round promotion effect C in FIG. 33 (H), maximum round promotion effect F in FIG. 36 (H), maximum round promotion effect G in FIG. 37 (H), FIG. 38. The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect H of (H) and the maximum round promotion effect I of FIG. 39 (I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (H) of the maximum round promotion effect A, the specific effect symbol and other effect symbols include at least a number symbol, and the first effect is Number symbols of other production symbols (number symbol 8Lb of the number "3" of the left production symbol 8L, number symbol 8Cb of the number "3" of the middle production symbol 8C, and number symbol 8Rb of the number "3" of the right production symbol 8R) Can be displayed by replacing with a number symbol of a specific effect symbol (a specific number symbol called the Roman number "X" attached to a specific character symbol that determines the promotion of the number of rounds). According to this configuration, even if a specific effect symbol is not displayed, the number symbols of other effect symbols are replaced with the number symbols of the specific effect symbol and displayed, so that the specific winning game (“16RV passage”) Since it is possible to notify the confirmation of the transition to the "scheduled jackpot"), the player can acquire an opportunity for a specific winning game.
Maximum round promotion effect D in FIG. 34 (G), maximum round promotion effect F in FIG. 36 (I), maximum round promotion effect J in FIGS. 40 (D) and (G), and FIGS. 41 (E) and 41 (G). The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect K.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 33 (I) of the maximum round promotion effect C, the specific effect symbol and other effect symbols include at least a character symbol, and the first effect is Character symbols of other effect symbols (character symbol 8La of left effect symbol 8L, character symbol 8Ca of middle effect symbol 8C, and character symbol 8Ra of right effect symbol 8R) are confirmed as character symbols of specific effect symbols (promotion of the number of rounds is confirmed). It can be displayed by replacing it with a specific character symbol with a specific number symbol "X". According to this configuration, even if the specific effect symbol is not displayed, the character symbol of the other effect symbol is replaced with the character symbol of the specific effect symbol and displayed, so that the specific winning game (“16RV passage”) Since it is possible to notify the confirmation of the transition to the "scheduled jackpot"), the player can acquire an opportunity for a specific winning game.
Maximum round promotion effect E in FIG. 35 (G), maximum round promotion effect I in FIG. 39 (J), maximum round promotion effect L in FIGS. 42 (D), (G), and FIG. 43 (E), (G). The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect M.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (H) of the maximum round promotion effect B, the first effect is a color (left effect symbol) attached to a part of other effect symbols. 8L number symbol 8Lb color, middle production symbol 8C number symbol 8Cb color and right production symbol 8R number symbol 8Rb color) are attached to a part of a specific production symbol (promotion of the number of rounds) It can be displayed by replacing it with the Roman numeral "X", which is the color of a specific number symbol. According to this configuration, even if a specific effect symbol is not displayed, the color attached to a part of the other effect symbol is replaced with the color attached to a part of the specific effect symbol and displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the confirmation of the transition to a specific winning game (“16RV planned passing jackpot”), so that the player can acquire an opportunity for a specific winning game.
The same applies to the maximum round promotion effect H in FIG. 38 (I).

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the maximum round promotion effect.
[Modification 1]
The effect symbols whose variable display is started before the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43 are various character symbols and number symbols (numbers "1" to "9", Roman numerals). It was configured with a number "X"), and the character symbol was mainly displayed in a large size, and the number symbol was attached in a size smaller than the size of the character symbol. However, the composition of the effect symbol may be left as it is, and the size and arrangement of the character symbol and the numerical symbol may be reversed. That is, the number symbols may be displayed in a large size as the main body, and the effect symbols may be configured so that the character symbols are attached in a size smaller than the size of the number symbols. Even in the case of such a configuration, in the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43, even if a specific effect symbol is not displayed, an effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol (others). Part of (character symbol or number symbol) of ), It is possible to obtain an opportunity for a specific winning game. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43, a part (character symbol or number symbol) of the effect symbol (other effect symbol) different from the specific effect symbol is one of the specific effect symbols. It was replaced with a part (a specific character symbol or a specific number symbol) and displayed to notify the confirmation of the transition to a specific winning game (“16RV scheduled passing jackpot”). When a part of an effect symbol (another effect symbol) different from a specific effect symbol is replaced with a part of a specific effect symbol, which part is changed to a predetermined light emitting mode with a predetermined color. It may suggest whether to replace it. Examples of the "predetermined color" include white, gold (yellow), and seven colors (rainbow). Examples of the "predetermined light emitting mode" include lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting.

[Modification 3]
In the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43, a part (character symbol or number symbol) of the effect symbol (other effect symbol) different from the specific effect symbol is one of the specific effect symbols. It was replaced with a part (a specific character symbol or a specific number symbol) and displayed to notify the confirmation of the transition to a specific winning game (“16RV scheduled passing jackpot”). When replacing a part of an effect symbol (another effect symbol) different from a specific effect symbol with a part of a specific effect symbol, by changing the display mode of the replaced part, it is suggested which part is replaced. It may be. For example, the maximum round promotion effect A in FIG. 31, the maximum round promotion effect B in FIG. 32, the maximum round promotion effect D in FIG. 34, the maximum round promotion effect F in FIG. 36, the maximum round promotion effect H in FIG. 38, and FIG. In the maximum round promotion effect J and the maximum round promotion effect K in FIG. 41, the numerical symbols that are the replacement parts are changed to a rotating display mode, and the maximum round promotion effect C in FIG. 33 and the maximum round promotion effect E in FIG. In the maximum round promotion effect I of FIG. 39, the maximum round promotion effect L of FIG. 42, and the maximum round promotion effect M of FIG. 43, the display mode in which the character symbol, which is a replacement portion, is rotated is changed. Even in the maximum round promotion effect G of FIG. 37, although it is not replaced as a result, the display mode is changed so that the character symbol or the numerical symbol is rotated.

[Modification example 4]
Of the maximum round promotion effects A to maximum round promotion effects M in FIGS. 31 to 43, the maximum round promotion effect D in FIG. 34, the maximum round promotion effect E in FIG. 35, and the maximum round promotion effects J to 43 in FIG. 40. In the maximum round promotion effect excluding the maximum round promotion effect M, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 63 (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, a specific effect is produced. A specific hit game by replacing a part (character symbol or number symbol) of an effect symbol (other effect symbol) different from the symbol with a part of a specific effect symbol (specific character symbol or specific number symbol) and displaying it. It was possible to notify the confirmation of the transition to ("16RV passing jackpot"). Instead of the effect button 63, a sword button 65 that can be operated by the player may be used. Even with this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment as if he / she attracted a specific winning game by an operation of his / her own will.

[Modification 5]
In the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43, a part (character symbol or number symbol) of the effect symbol (other effect symbol) different from the specific effect symbol is one of the specific effect symbols. It was replaced with a part (a specific character symbol or a specific number symbol) and displayed to notify the confirmation of the transition to a specific winning game (“16RV scheduled passing jackpot”). When a part of an effect symbol (another effect symbol) different from the specific effect symbol is replaced with a part of the specific effect symbol, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or 3 seconds). May be darkened. In this way, it is possible to more effectively produce whether or not the transition to a specific winning game is confirmed.

[Modification 6]
Of the maximum round promotion effects A to maximum round promotion effects M in FIGS. 31 to 43, the maximum round promotion effect D in FIG. 34, the maximum round promotion effect E in FIG. 35, and the maximum round promotion effects J to 43 in FIG. 40. In the maximum round promotion effect excluding the maximum round promotion effect M, an effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a in a predetermined light emitting mode, and a jackpot game having a maximum round according to the predetermined light emitting mode (big hit effect). ) Was suggested. However, it may suggest the degree of expectation of acquiring a jackpot game (big hit effect) having a maximum round according to the size of the effect button image BTN displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of acquiring a jackpot game (big hit effect) having the maximum round according only to the size of the effect button image BTN, or the size of the effect button image BTN and a predetermined value of the effect button image BTN. It may suggest the degree of expectation of acquiring a jackpot game (big hit effect) having a maximum round in combination with a light emitting mode. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment as if he / she attracted a specific winning game (“16RV planned passing jackpot”) by his / her own intentional operation.

[Modification 7]
In the specific production symbol, the specific character symbol and the specific number symbol "X" were both divinely colored in gold (yellow), which is a specific color. However, seven colors (rainbow) may be used instead of gold (yellow). In this way, in the maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect I of FIGS. 31 to 39, the colors of the replaced (switched, replaced) character symbols and number symbols are colored in seven colors (rainbow). , Since it can be made to appear as a rare effect, the player can get a sense of superiority.

[Modification 8]
In the maximum round promotion effect J to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 40 to 43, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and then temporarily stopped. 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R were falling (sliding downward) or rising (jumping, jumping, sliding upward). However, when the player operates the effect button 63 (operation means) after the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect are stopped. The symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be dropped (sliding downward) or ascended (jumping, jumping, sliding upward). In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment as if he / she attracted a specific winning game (“16RV planned passing jackpot”) by promoting the number of rounds by his / her own voluntary operation.

[Modification 9]
The maximum round promotion effect A to the maximum round promotion effect M of FIGS. 31 to 43 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means for displaying a plurality of types of production symbols.
It has a specific effect symbol for notifying the determination of transition to a specific hit game among a plurality of types of hit games, and another effect symbol different from the specific effect symbol.
It is possible to execute the first effect of replacing a part of the other effect symbol with a part of the specific effect symbol and displaying it to notify the determination of the transition to the specific hit game.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
Before executing the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of notifying a notice of transition to another hit game different from the specific hit game among the plurality of types of hit games.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2.
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the player
The first effect can be executed based on the operation of the operating means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
The specific effect symbol and the other effect symbols include at least a number symbol.
The first effect is displayed by replacing the number symbol of the other effect symbol with the number symbol of the specific effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
The specific effect symbol and the other effect symbols include at least a character symbol.
In the first effect, the character symbol of the other effect symbol is replaced with the character symbol of the specific effect symbol and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
The first effect is displayed by replacing the color attached to a part of the other effect symbol with the color attached to a part of the specific effect symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The timer effects A to J will be described below with reference to FIGS. 44 to 55. In FIGS. 44 to 55, a plurality of effect symbols (three effect symbols) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be omitted due to the ease of viewing the drawings.

The effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) are composed of various character symbols with number symbols (numbers "1" to "9"), and are mainly character symbols. It is displayed large as, and a number symbol is attached in a size smaller than the size of the character symbol. The various character symbols are associated with each other so that different characters do not overlap.

The left effect symbol 8L is composed of the character symbol 8La with the number symbol 8Lb, the middle effect symbol 8C is composed of the character symbol 8Ca with the number symbol 8Cb, and the right effect symbol 8R is the character symbol 8Ra with the number symbol 8Rb. Is attached and configured.

For odd numbers (that is, numbers "1", numbers "3", numbers "5", numbers "7" and numbers "9"), the numbers are for odd numbers different from the specific color (gold (yellow)). It is colored red, which is the normal color. For even-numbered numbers (that is, number "2", number "4", number "6" and number "8"), the numbers are colored blue, which is a normal color for even numbers that is different from the specific color (gold (yellow)). Has been done. In addition, various character patterns are colored in a normal color (a single color or a plurality of colors expressing the individuality of the character) different from a specific color (gold (yellow)). ..

In the timer effects A to J, the timer to be counted down is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining time. Within this remaining time, there is a possibility that a runaway action production (runaway battle production) with a high expectation that a profit will be given to the player (big hit) will be started (deployment, occurrence, appearance). In other words, in timer effects A to J, runaway action effects (runaway battle effects) may be started (deployed, generated, appear) only while timer effects A to J are being performed. There is. As a result, when the timer effects A to J are performed, the player can obtain a chance of winning (big hit) by the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) within the remaining time.

There are multiple development super reach productions (also referred to as "development special reach productions", hereinafter referred to as "development SP reach productions"), which are set with a high degree of expectation to be a hit (big hit) that gives profits to the player. .. The runaway action production (runaway battle production) is one of the multiple development SP reach productions, and among the multiple development SP reach productions, the player is given a profit (big hit). It is the one with the highest expectation. The runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may be performed after the reach is formed, or may be performed even if the reach is not formed.

In the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), the character symbols that make up the predetermined effect symbol suddenly pop out as a character from the effect symbol in the state where the temporary stop is displayed by combining the predetermined effect symbols, and the battle by the character is a runaway action (runaway action). It is a production that starts (deploys, occurs, appears) as a runaway battle). The production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is the development SP reach production, is variable by inserting various images during the production, and the short one is 65 seconds and the long one is 90 seconds. In the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is the development SP reach production, when the ally character finally wins the enemy character, it becomes a hit (big hit).

In the timer effects A to F, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) by the hold icon 9C is started, stopped, and the deviation is confirmed. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A becomes the hold icon 9C, and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8R). While it is an effect that can appear across a plurality of variable displays by 8C, right effect symbol 8R), in timer effects GL, the effect symbol (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C) by the hold icon 9C is used. , Right effect symbol 8R) Temporarily stop display, then re-variation display is started, temporary stop display and re-variation display start are repeated (so-called "pseudo-ream" is performed), and can appear only with the hold icon 9C. It differs in that it is a production.

The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, fluctuation effect start commands) received from the sub-control board 90, and when instructions for executing timer effects A to J are included, the corresponding image is taken from the ROM 103. The data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image control microcomputer 101 may make the player think that the start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) time (timing) of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) in the timer effects A to J is arbitrarily generated. The start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) timing (timing) of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is determined according to the instructions of various commands (for example, the variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90. You may decide whether or not to start (deploy, occur, appear) the runaway action production (runaway battle production) independently, and if you win, start the runaway action production (runaway battle production) independently (runaway battle production). Deployment, occurrence, appearance) time (timing) may be arbitrarily determined in real time.

Here, the timer effect A will be described first, and then the timer effect B, the timer effect C, the timer effect D, the timer effect E, the timer effect F, the timer effect G, the timer effect H, the timer effect I, the timer effect J, and the timer effect K. Then, the timer effect L will be described in order.

[Timer production A]
First, the timer effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A. First, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 44 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 44 (A) is started, the timer effect A is started as shown in FIG. 44 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 44 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 44 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner. Is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 30 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 44 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner. Is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), the remaining time is displayed as 20 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 44 (H), the remaining time is displayed as 10 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 44 (G)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the remaining time is less than 15 seconds, the timer image TMR switches from the first display mode to the second display mode. In the second display mode, the entire rectangular area is blinked in red and the remaining time is blinked in white.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position are accompanied by this. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes 0 and changes to the blue number "0". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number "0" continues.

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner. Is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 44 (I), the remaining time on the timer image TMR is 0 seconds (zero seconds). At the time when is displayed, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued. When the remaining time is displayed as 0 seconds (zero seconds) on the timer image TMR (that is, when the countdown by the timer image TMR continues and the remaining time reaches the predetermined time of 0 seconds (zero seconds)), the predetermined time After (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, and the timer effect A ends without starting (deploying, generating, appearing) the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect).

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 44 (J), the timer image TMR has already disappeared from the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Will be done. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, when the timer production A is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production A is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect A can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect A, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect A.

[Timer production B]
Next, the timer effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 45 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 45 (A) is started, the timer effect B is started as shown in FIG. 45 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 45 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 45 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the white spherical hold icon 9C has a spherical shape of seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). The holding icon changes to 9C, and variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued.

The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 45 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 45 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 37 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 45 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other. Then, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly pops out from the middle effect symbol 8C as an ally character CRA, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R suddenly pops out from the right effect symbol 8R as an enemy character CRB. Further, the two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (G), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of 37 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect B ends, and the left side of the display screen 7a Along with the placement of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 37 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 37 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (H), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the wing man form is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the wing man form. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect)) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad again. , The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. , The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears from the display screen 7a. Will disappear. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed are in various normal colors.

In this way, when the timer production B is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production B is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect B can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect B, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect B.

[Timer production C]
Next, the timer effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 46 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 46 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 46 (A) is started, the timer effect C is started as shown in FIG. 46 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 46 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 46 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 46 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) are displayed in a variable manner. Is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 46 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 30 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 46 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears at the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the white spherical hold icon 9C changes to the green spherical hold icon 9C. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (G), the remaining time is displayed as 25 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 46 (H), the remaining time is displayed as 13 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 12 seconds have passed from FIG. 46 (G)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C move with each other so that the enemy character CRB faces each other. Then, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L suddenly pops out from the left effect symbol 8L as an enemy character CRB, and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly pops out from the middle effect symbol 8C as a ally character CRA. Further, one hold icon 9A and four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46 (I), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of only 13 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect C ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the enemy character CRB, the ally character CRA is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 13 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 13 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), here, an effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, and although not shown, the enemy character CRB is in the center of the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA crouching behind the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 46 (J), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". The stop display is displayed, and the disconnection is confirmed. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C return from the specific color gold (yellow) to the original various normal colors, and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold. The display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the display position 9Ad, the hold display position 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed. It becomes.

In this way, when the timer effect C is performed, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production C is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect C can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect C, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect C.

[Timer production D]
Next, the timer effect D will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D. First, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 47 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 47 (A) is started, the timer effect D is started as shown in FIG. 47 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The number of seconds is being counted up. The timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the 0th (zero) display mode. In the 0th (zero) display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in sky blue, and the number of seconds to be counted up is lit in black. Specifically, the number of seconds is added from the initial value 0 (zero) by combining these, such as +1 second, +3 seconds, +5 seconds, and +10 seconds.

When the added total time reaches a single fixed time (60 seconds here), the timer image TMR starts from the single fixed time (60 seconds here), as shown in FIG. 47 (C). Indicates the remaining time counted down. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is switched from the 0th (zero) 1 display mode to the 1st display mode and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 47 (D), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 47 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 47 (D)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) The variable display starts. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued.

The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 47 (G), the remaining time is displayed as 37 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 47 (F)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other in a display mode. Then, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L suddenly pops out from the left effect symbol 8L as an ally character CRA, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R suddenly pops out from the right effect symbol 8R as an enemy character CRB. Further, the two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (H), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of 37 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect D ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 37 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 37 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 47 (J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad, The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears, and the hold icon 9C is displayed from the display screen 7a. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are in various normal colors.

In FIG. 47 (I), the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is not performed, but the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, and the display screen 7a shows " When the message MG of "defeat" is displayed, in FIG. 47 (J), the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "3", which are the same. The symbols are not aligned and the stop display is displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R return from the specific color gold (yellow) to the original various normal colors, and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold. The display position 9Ad and the 4th hold display position 9Ad are displayed, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the 1st hold display position 9Ad and the 2nd hold display position 9Ad, and the 3rd hold display position 9Ad and the 4th hold are displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the display position 9Ad, the hold display position 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed. It becomes.

In this way, when the timer production D is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production D is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect D can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect D, when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared), but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect D.

[Timer production E]
Next, the timer effect E will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect E. First, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 48 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 48 (A) is started, the timer effect E is started as shown in FIG. 48 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 48 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". The same pattern is displayed as a stop without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) The variable display starts. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued.

The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At the time point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 48 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 30 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 48 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (G), when the remaining time is displayed as 27 seconds in the timer image TMR (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 48 (F)), the temporary stop is displayed on the left. Of the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form. At this time, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other. Then, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly jumps out from the middle effect symbol 8C as an enemy character CRB, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R is used as a wing man-shaped ally character CRA from the right effect symbol 8R. Suddenly pops out. Further, the two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (H), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of only 27 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect E ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the enemy character CRB, the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man and the enemy character CRB starts (deploys, Occurrence, appearance), and the battle will be fought. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 27 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 27 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), here, an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the wing man form is performed, and the ally character CRA in the wing man form is performed. Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG of "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character in the form of a wing man) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man crouching behind the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 48 (J), on the display screen 7a, the character symbols 8La, 8Ca, and 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all in the form of a wing man. The symbols are the same as the character symbols, and the numerical symbols constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "5"). A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit). Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect)) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad again. , The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. , The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears from the display screen 7a. Will disappear.

The character symbols 8La, 8Ca, and 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are all gold (yellow), which is a specific color. On the other hand, the numerical symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are red, which is a normal color for odd numbers.

The number symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Lb that compose the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed are changed from the normal color for odd numbers (red) to the specific color gold (yellow). You may switch.

In this way, when the timer production E is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production E is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect E can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect E, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect E.

[Timer production F]
Next, the timer effect F will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect F. First, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the lower left side (lower left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the lower left side (lower left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 49 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 49 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the timer effect F is started, and as the first timer, a timer having a large rectangular area in the center of the display screen 7a. Image TMR1 is displayed. The timer image TMR1 shows the remaining time counted down from the fixed time (here, 99 seconds). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR1 is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the first timer display mode. In the first timer display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in light gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR1 is started, the timer image TMR1 is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper left side (upper left corner) while maintaining the first timer display mode. .. When the timer image TMR1 is moved to the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR1 is the size of the timer image TMR1 when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR1 is started and the remaining time is displayed as 90 seconds on the timer image TMR1 as shown in FIG. 49 (C) (that is, when 9 seconds have passed from FIG. 49 (B)). , The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued. At this time, as the second timer, the timer image TMR2 having a large rectangular area in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. The size of the timer image TMR2 that is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a is the same as the size of the timer image TMR1 that is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 49 (B). The timer image TMR2 shows the remaining time counted down from the fixed time (here, 60 seconds). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR2 is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the second timer display mode. In the second timer display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in strong gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR2 is started, the timer image TMR2 is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the second timer display mode. .. When the timer image TMR2 has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR2 is the size of the timer image TMR2 when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

The countdown by the timer image TMR1 is continued and the countdown by the timer image TMR2 is started. As shown in FIG. 49 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 85 seconds in the timer image TMR1 and the remaining time is displayed in the timer image TMR2. At the time when 55 seconds is displayed (that is, when 5 seconds have passed from FIG. 49 (C)), the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued. There is.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 49 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 75 seconds on the timer image TMR1. At the same time, when the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR2 (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 49 (D)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3" and the middle effect symbol 8C is. The number "4" and the right effect symbol 8R become the number "5", and the same symbols are stopped and displayed without being aligned, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad is accompanied by this. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears at 9Ad. Further, the first special figure hold and the game ball to the second starting port 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 arranged and displayed on the lower left side (lower left corner) of the display screen 7a. Although the numbers are not shown for the second special figure hold based on the entry of the ball, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2". Then, the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is zero, and the red number continues to be "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) The variable display starts. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is continued.

The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 70 seconds on the timer image TMR1. At the time when the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR2 (that is, when 5 seconds have passed from FIG. 49 (E)), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) ) Is continuing to be displayed.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are numbers. It becomes "7", and the same symbols are aligned and temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is continued to form a reach. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 disappear from the display screen 7a, and the timer effect F Is finished. At the time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR1 actually has a remaining time of 67 seconds, and the timer image TMR2 has a remaining time of 37 seconds, but the timer image TMR1 and the timer image are displayed from the display screen 7a. TMR2 disappears and timer effect F ends.

After the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 49 (H), the ally character CRA is arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB is arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is arranged. The runaway action (runaway battle) between the enemy character CRB and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle is unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. As described above, the timer image TMR1 actually has a remaining time of 67 seconds, and the timer image TMR2 actually has a remaining time of 37 seconds, as described above, but the timer image TMR1 and The timer image TMR2 disappears and all the remaining times are reset, so that the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured. In other words, even if the timer image TMR1 has only 67 seconds remaining time and the timer image TMR2 has only 37 seconds remaining time, the runaway action has a longer production time than these remaining times. The production (runaway battle production) is not ended in the middle, and all the contents from the beginning to the end of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) can be provided to the player.

From the time the reach is formed to the start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action (runaway battle), the two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold are held. The display position 9Cd is hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49 (J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad, The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears, and the hold icon 9C is displayed from the display screen 7a. It will disappear.

In the timer effect F, in FIG. 49 (I), the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is not performed, but the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed. When the message MG of "defeat" is displayed on the display screen 7a, for example, in FIG. 49 (J), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is. The number "7" may be displayed as a stop without being aligned with the same symbol, and the deviation may be confirmed, and even if a reach is formed in FIG. 49 (G), the runaway in FIG. 49 (H) may occur. The action (runaway battle) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared) (so-called normal reach), and in FIG. 49 (J), for example, the left production symbol 8L is the number "7" and the middle production symbol 8C is the number "4". , The right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the same symbol may not be aligned and may be stopped and displayed, and the deviation may be confirmed.

When the loss is confirmed and displayed, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed again, and the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and further, the hold display position is concerned. 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

In this way, when the timer effect F is performed, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player can display the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 on the display screen 7a. As long as it is displayed, it is possible to expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, as in the past, the player starts (deploys, occurs, appears) to develop SP reach production with high expectation that it is a hit (big hit) in which a plurality of timer images are displayed and a profit is given to the player. In the case of suggesting, for example, when three timer images (plurality of timer images) of 5 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds are displayed, the plurality of timer images are set in a short time (in other words,). For example, 60 seconds, 70 seconds, 80 seconds, 90 seconds, 100 seconds, etc., which are set for a long time are not included), even if these timer images are displayed, the development SP reach effect The player cannot expect the start (development, generation, appearance), while displaying three timer images (multiple timer images) of, for example, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, and 90 seconds, the plurality of timer images will be displayed. Of these, those set for a long time are included, so when the timer image with a long time set is displayed, the player expects the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the development SP reach production. It was done. On the other hand, in the timer effect F, when the timer effect F is performed, a plurality of timer images called the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 are displayed, and then all the timer images disappear from the display screen 7a and the remaining time thereof. By resetting all of, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is the development SP reach production, may be started (deployed, generated, and appeared). Therefore, when a plurality of timer images, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2, are displayed, the player responds to the start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is the development SP reach effect. Can be expected. Further, in the timer effect F, it is possible to contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect F, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect F.

[Timer production G]
Next, the timer effect G will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect G. First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 50 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 50 (A) is started, the timer effect G is started as shown in FIG. 50 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 50 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down again, and as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the remaining time in the timer image TMR is 30 seconds. At the time of display (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 50 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". ", And the same pattern is not aligned and the temporary stop is displayed again.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is restarted. That is, the pseudo-ream continues. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued, and as shown in FIG. 50 (G), when the remaining time is displayed as 20 seconds on the timer image TMR, the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C) are displayed. , The variable display of the right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 50 (H), the remaining time is displayed as 10 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 50 (G)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "5", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and the temporary stop is displayed again. When the remaining time is less than 15 seconds, the timer image TMR switches from the first display mode to the second display mode. In the second display mode, the entire rectangular area is blinked in red and the remaining time is blinked in white.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is restarted. That is, the pseudo-ream continues. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued, and as shown in FIG. 50 (I), when the remaining time is displayed as 0 seconds (zero seconds) in the timer image TMR, the effect symbol (left effect symbol 8L, The variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R) is continued. When the remaining time is displayed as 0 seconds (zero seconds) on the timer image TMR (that is, when the countdown by the timer image TMR continues and the remaining time reaches the predetermined time of 0 seconds (zero seconds)), the predetermined time After (for example, 2 seconds) elapses, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, and the timer effect G ends without starting (deploying, generating, appearing) the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect).

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. The left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Will be done. When the disengagement is confirmed and displayed, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, when the timer effect G is performed, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer effect G is performed, a runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle effect). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect G can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect G, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect G.

[Timer production H]
Next, the timer effect H will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect H. First, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 51 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 51 (A) is started, the timer effect H is started as shown in FIG. 51 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 51 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the white spherical hold icon 9C changes to the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon 9C, and the temporary stop display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right) is displayed. The re-variation display of the effect symbol 8R) is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 51 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 37 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 51 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other. Then, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly pops out from the middle effect symbol 8C as an ally character CRA, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R suddenly pops out from the right effect symbol 8R as an enemy character CRB. Further, the three hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (G), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of 37 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect H ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 37 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 37 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 (H), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect)) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad again. , The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are white spheres. The hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears from the display screen 7a. Will disappear. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed are in various normal colors.

In this way, when the timer effect H is performed, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production H is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect H can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect H, when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared), but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect H.

[Timer production I]
Next, the timer effect I will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect I. First, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 52 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 52 (A) is started, the timer effect I is started as shown in FIG. 52 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued. At this time, the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to the blue spherical holding icon 9C.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 52 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 46 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the blue spherical hold icon 9C changes to the green spherical hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped are displayed again and again. Is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 52 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 30 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 52 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "5", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the green spherical hold icon 9C changes to the red spherical hold icon 9C, and the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped are displayed again and again. Is started. That is, the pseudo-ream continues. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 25 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 52 (H), the remaining time is displayed as 13 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 12 seconds have passed from FIG. 52 (G)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C move with each other so that the enemy character CRB faces each other. Then, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L suddenly pops out from the left effect symbol 8L as an enemy character CRB, and the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly pops out from the middle effect symbol 8C as a ally character CRA. Further, the three hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (I), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of only 13 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect I ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the enemy character CRB, the ally character CRA is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 13 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 13 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), here, an effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, and although not shown, the enemy character CRB is in the center of the display screen 7a. The ally character CRA crouching behind the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52 (J), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". The stop display is displayed, and the disconnection is confirmed. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C return from the specific color gold (yellow) to the original various normal colors, and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold. The display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9A is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the display position 9Ad, the hold display position 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed. It becomes.

In this way, when the timer production I is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production I is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect I can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect I, when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared), but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect I.

[Timer production J]
Next, the timer effect J will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect J. First, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 53 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 53 (A) is started, the timer effect J is started as shown in FIG. 53 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The number of seconds is being counted up. The timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the 0th (zero) display mode. In the 0th (zero) display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in sky blue, and the number of seconds to be counted up is lit in black. Specifically, the number of seconds is added from the initial value 0 (zero) by combining these, such as +1 second, +3 seconds, +5 seconds, and +10 seconds.

When the added total time reaches a single fixed time (60 seconds here), the timer image TMR starts from the single fixed time (60 seconds here), as shown in FIG. 53 (C). Indicates the remaining time counted down. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is switched from the 0th (zero) 1 display mode to the 1st display mode and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 53 (D), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 53 (D)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the remaining time is displayed as 37 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 53 (F)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other in a display mode. Then, the character symbol 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L suddenly pops out from the left effect symbol 8L as an ally character CRA, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R suddenly pops out from the right effect symbol 8R as an enemy character CRB. Further, the three hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of 37 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect J ends, and the left side of the display screen 7a Along with the placement of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle begins. It will be unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 37 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 37 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect)) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad again. , The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are white spheres. The hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears from the display screen 7a. Will disappear. The left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed are in various normal colors.

In FIG. 53 (I), the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is not performed, but the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, and the display screen 7a shows " When the message MG of "defeat" is displayed, in FIG. 53 (J), the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "3", which are the same. The symbols are not aligned and the stop display is displayed, and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R return from the specific color gold (yellow) to the original various normal colors, and again, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold. The display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9A is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed at the display position 9Ad, the hold display position 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed. It becomes.

In this way, when the timer production J is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production J is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect J can contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect J, when the predetermined time is reached, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect J.

[Timer production K]
Next, the timer effect K will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect K. First, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 54 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 54 (A) is started, the timer effect K is started as shown in FIG. 54 (B), and the timer image TMR having a large rectangular area is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .. The timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (60 seconds in this case). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. .. Further, the timer image TMR is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the first display mode. In the first display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR is started, the timer image TMR is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the first display mode. When the timer image TMR has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR is the size of the timer image TMR when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR is started and the remaining time is displayed as 55 seconds on the timer image TMR as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect) The variable display of the symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 54 (C)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that point, the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is decelerated, and as shown in FIG. 54 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 30 seconds on the timer image TMR. At that time (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 54 (E)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Next, the same pattern is not aligned and a temporary stop is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), when the remaining time is displayed as 27 seconds in the timer image TMR (that is, when 3 seconds have passed from FIG. 54 (F)), the temporary stop is displayed on the left. Of the effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form. At this time, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R are switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color, and the display mode is changed to a divinely colored display mode. The character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R move with each other so as to face each other. Then, the character symbol 8Ca constituting the middle effect symbol 8C suddenly jumps out from the middle effect symbol 8C as an enemy character CRB, and the character symbol 8Ra constituting the right effect symbol 8R is used as a wing man-shaped ally character CRA from the right effect symbol 8R. Suddenly pops out. Further, the three hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold display position 9Cd are hidden. The number symbols 8Cb constituting the middle effect symbol 8C and the number symbols 8Rb constituting the right effect symbol 8R may also be switched from various normal colors to gold (yellow), which is a specific color.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (H), although the timer image TMR has a remaining time of only 27 seconds, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a, the timer effect K ends, and the timer image TMR ends on the left side of the display screen 7a. Along with the placement of the enemy character CRB, the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is placed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the runaway action (runaway battle) between the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man and the enemy character CRB starts (deploys, Occurrence, appearance), and the battle will be fought. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. Even if there is only 27 seconds remaining time, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured by resetting this remaining time. In other words, even if the timer image TMR has only 27 seconds remaining, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which has a longer production time than this remaining time, is not ended in the middle, and the runaway action production (runaway) It is possible to provide the player with all the contents from the beginning to the end of the battle production).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), here, an effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the wing man form is performed, and the ally character CRA in the wing man form is performed. Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG of "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character in the form of a wing man) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At the same time, the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man crouching behind the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), on the display screen 7a, the character symbols 8La, 8Ca, and 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all in the form of a wing man. The symbols are the same as the character symbols, and the numerical symbols constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "5"). A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) is performed in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit). Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect)) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad again. , The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are white spheres. The hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears from the display screen 7a. Will disappear.

The character symbols 8La, 8Ca, and 8La constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are all gold (yellow), which is a specific color. On the other hand, the numerical symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Lb constituting the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are stopped and displayed, are red, which is a normal color for odd numbers.

The number symbols 8Lb, 8Cb, and 8Lb that compose the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are stopped and displayed are changed from the normal color for odd numbers (red) to the specific color gold (yellow). You may switch.

In this way, when the timer production K is performed, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player has the timer image TMR displayed on the display screen 7a. As long as you can expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), you can improve the interest.

In addition, when the timer production K is performed, a runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production with a high expectation that a profit is given to the player in the remaining time (big hit), has started (runaway battle production). Since it may be expanded, generated, and appearing), the timer effect K can contribute to eliminating (wiping) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect K, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect K.

[Timer production L]
Next, the timer effect L will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect L. First, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left effect symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle effect symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right effect symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of the effect symbols (composed of various character symbols with numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the above. When the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the stopped-displayed effect symbol changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the effect symbol can be visually recognized via the semi-transparent effect symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the effect symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state where the temporary stop display is displayed, the effect symbol has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Although not shown, a sub-variable region is provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a, in which small effect symbols corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are displayed in a variable manner. The small effect symbol is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation is started, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the variable display of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R is started, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R correspond to each other in the sub-variation area. The small effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small effect symbols are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. (For example, even if the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small effect symbol 8L corresponding to the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. However, all of the right effect symbols 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8L are displayed. Each of the small effect symbols corresponding to the 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be the same as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Good. Further, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and a big hit occurs, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C , The right effect symbol 8R and the corresponding small effect symbols are aligned with the same symbols as the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R.

The hold icon 9C corresponding to the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a first hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this first hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of 9A, and suggests to the player the degree of expectation of hitting the hold icon 9C from the shape and color of the hold icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the 4th hold display position 9Ad moves to the 3rd hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the 3rd hold display position 9Ad is the second hold display. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each hold icon 9A is the same as the size of the hold icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9Ad is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad. Is displayed, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the three hold icons 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a state of being stocked without being digested.

Further, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of the effect symbol. , In addition to the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 Although not shown, the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is arranged and displayed on the lower left side (lower left corner) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Although not shown here, there are three first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the blue number "3" is on the left side, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The second special figure hold based on the above is arranged and displayed on the lower left side (lower left corner) of the display screen 7a in a state where the red number "0" is separated from each other on the right side.

Here, the hold icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “hold icon”) will be briefly described. The difference in shape and color indicates the difference in the degree of expectation of winning in the lottery corresponding to the hold icon. ing. For example, a seven-color (rainbow (rich jackpot)) spherical hold icon, a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, a red spherical hold icon, and a green spherical hold icon. Of the eight hold icons, the blue spherical hold icon and the white spherical hold icon, the seven-color (rainbow (big hit rich)) spherical hold icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold The icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical hold icon has the third highest expectation, the smiling sphere hold icon has the fourth highest expectation, and the red spherical hold icon has the fifth highest expectation. The green spherical hold icon has the 6th highest expectation, the blue spherical hold icon has the 7th highest expectation, and the white spherical hold icon has the lowest expectation. It has become.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the start of the variation of the effect symbol in FIG. 55 (A).

The variable display of the effect symbol in FIG. 55 (A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the timer effect L is started, and as the first timer, a timer having a large rectangular area in the center of the display screen 7a. Image TMR1 is displayed. The timer image TMR1 shows the remaining time counted down from the fixed time (here, 99 seconds). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR1 is largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the first timer display mode. In the first timer display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in light gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR1 is started, the timer image TMR1 is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper left side (upper left corner) while maintaining the first timer display mode. .. When the timer image TMR1 has been moved to the upper left side (upper left corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR1 is the size of the timer image TMR1 when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

When the countdown by the timer image TMR1 is started and the remaining time is displayed as 90 seconds on the timer image TMR1 as shown in FIG. 55 (C) (that is, when 9 seconds have passed from FIG. 55 (B)). , The variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued. At this time, as the second timer, the timer image TMR2 having a large rectangular area in the center of the display screen 7a is displayed. The size of the timer image TMR2 that is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a is the same as the size of the timer image TMR1 that is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 55 (B). The timer image TMR2 shows the remaining time counted down from the fixed time (here, 60 seconds). It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that some kind of production (runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is a development SP reach production) may occur in the remaining time. Further, the timer image TMR2 is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a in the second timer display mode. In the second timer display mode, the entire rectangular area is lit in strong gray and the remaining time is lit in black.

Before the countdown by the timer image TMR2 is started, the timer image TMR2 is reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) while maintaining the second timer display mode. .. When the timer image TMR2 has been moved to the upper right side (upper right corner) of the display screen 7a and is arranged, the size of the timer image TMR2 is the size of the timer image TMR2 when it is arranged in the center of the display screen 7a. The vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are each about one-third the size of the above.

The countdown by the timer image TMR1 is continued and the countdown by the timer image TMR2 is started. As shown in FIG. 55 (D), the remaining time is displayed as 85 seconds in the timer image TMR1 and the remaining time is displayed in the timer image TMR2. At the time when 55 seconds is displayed (that is, when 5 seconds have passed from FIG. 55 (C)), the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is continued. There is.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the remaining time is displayed as 75 seconds on the timer image TMR1. At the same time, when the remaining time is displayed as 45 seconds on the timer image TMR2 (that is, when 10 seconds have passed from FIG. 55 (D)), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3" and the middle effect symbol 8C is. The number "4" and the right effect symbol 8R become the number "5", and the same symbols are not aligned and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, the re-variation display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped and displayed is started. That is, the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the countdown by the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is continued. The re-variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the remaining time is displayed as 70 seconds on the timer image TMR1. At the same time, when the remaining time is displayed as 40 seconds on the timer image TMR2 (that is, when 5 seconds have passed from FIG. 49 (E)), the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol). The variable display of 8R) is continued.

After that, the speed due to the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is slowed down, and as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are numbers. It becomes "7", and the same symbols are aligned and temporarily stopped, and the variable display of the middle effect symbol 8C is continued to form a reach. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 disappear from the display screen 7a, and the timer effect L Is finished. At the time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR1 actually has a remaining time of 67 seconds, and the timer image TMR2 has a remaining time of 37 seconds, but the timer image TMR1 and the timer image are displayed from the display screen 7a. TMR2 disappears and the timer effect L ends.

After the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the ally character CRA is arranged on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the enemy character CRB is arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is arranged. The runaway action (runaway battle) between the enemy character CRB and the enemy character CRB is started (deployment, occurrence, appearance), and the battle is unfolded. As described above, the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is variable by inserting various images during the production, and is 65 seconds for the short one and 90 seconds for the long one. As described above, the timer image TMR1 actually has a remaining time of 67 seconds, and the timer image TMR2 actually has a remaining time of 37 seconds, as described above, but the timer image TMR1 and The timer image TMR2 disappears and all the remaining times are reset, so that the production time of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) is secured. In other words, even if the timer image TMR1 has only 67 seconds remaining time and the timer image TMR2 has only 37 seconds remaining time, the runaway action has a longer production time than these remaining times. The production (runaway battle production) is not ended in the middle, and all the contents from the beginning to the end of the runaway action production (runaway battle production) can be provided to the player.

From the time the reach is formed to the start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action (runaway battle), the three hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are hidden, and the hold icon 9C and the hold are held. The display position 9Cd is hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), at the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), the ally character CRA becomes a wing man form, and an effect of notifying the victory of the wing man form ally character CRA is performed. The ally character CRA in the wing man form is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message MG "victory" is arranged and displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA in the wing man form. At the end of the runaway action (runaway battle), when the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and the enemy character. The ally character CRA crouching behind the CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the message MG "defeat" is arranged and displayed slightly below the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a with the same symbol (here, the number "7"). , A hit game (big hit game (big hit production)) in which a profit is given to the player as a hit (big hit) is performed. Before the hit game (big hit game (big hit effect) ends and the variable display of the effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) starts, the first hold display position 9Ad, The second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, and the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad are white spherical. The hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears, and the hold icon 9C is displayed from the display screen 7a. It will disappear.

In the timer effect L, in FIG. 55 (I), the effect of notifying the victory of the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is not performed, and the effect of notifying the victory of the enemy character CRB (that is, the defeat of the ally character) is performed. When the message MG of "defeat" is displayed on the display screen 7a, for example, in FIG. 55 (J), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is. The number "7" may be displayed as a stop without being aligned with the same symbol, and the deviation may be confirmed, and even if reach is formed in FIG. 55 (G), the runaway in FIG. 55 (H) is formed. The action (runaway battle) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared) (so-called normal reach), and in FIG. 55 (J), for example, the left production symbol 8L is the number "7" and the middle production symbol 8C is the number "4". , The right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "7", and the same symbol may not be aligned and may be stopped and displayed, and the deviation may be confirmed.

When the loss is confirmed and displayed, the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed again, and the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad are displayed. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. 9Cd appears again, and the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the detachment is confirmed and displayed.

In this way, when the timer effect L is performed, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is a development SP reach effect with high expectation that the player is given a profit (big hit) in the remaining time, is It may be started (deployed, generated, spawned). As a result, the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) may suddenly start (deploy, occur, appear) within the remaining time, so that the player can display the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 on the display screen 7a. As long as it is displayed, it is possible to expect the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action production (runaway battle production), and it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, as in the past, the player starts (deploys, occurs, appears) to develop SP reach production with high expectation that it is a hit (big hit) in which a plurality of timer images are displayed and a profit is given to the player. In the case of suggesting, for example, when three timer images (plurality of timer images) of 5 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds are displayed, the plurality of timer images are set in a short time (in other words,). For example, 60 seconds, 70 seconds, 80 seconds, 90 seconds, 100 seconds, etc., which are set for a long time are not included), even if these timer images are displayed, the development SP reach effect The player cannot expect the start (development, generation, appearance), while displaying three timer images (multiple timer images) of, for example, 5 seconds, 15 seconds, and 90 seconds, the plurality of timer images will be displayed. Of these, those set for a long time are included, so when the timer image with a long time set is displayed, the player expects the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the development SP reach production. It was done. On the other hand, in the timer effect L, when the timer effect L is performed, a plurality of timer images called the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 are displayed, and then all the timer images disappear from the display screen 7a and the remaining time thereof. By resetting all of, the runaway action production (runaway battle production), which is the development SP reach production, may be started (deployed, generated, and appeared). Therefore, when a plurality of timer images, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2, are displayed, the player responds to the start (deployment, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect), which is the development SP reach effect. Can be expected. Further, the timer effect L can contribute to eliminating (wiping out) the monotonous countdown caused by the timer image.

Further, in the timer effect L, the runaway action effect (specific effect) is not started (deployed, generated, and appeared) when the predetermined time is reached as in the conventional case, but one time (that is, an arbitrary time). ), The runaway action effect (specific effect) may start (deploy, occur, appear), so the player knows when the runaway action effect (specific effect) will start (deploy, occur, appear). It can be difficult to get rid of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the timer effect L.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the timer effect A of FIG. 44, the timer effect B of FIG. 45, the timer effect C of FIG. 46, the timer effect D of FIG. 47, the timer effect E of FIG. In the effect F, an image display device 7 (display means) for displaying a plurality of types of effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, right effect symbol 8R) is provided, and a plurality of effect symbols (left effect symbol 8L, middle) are provided. During the first effect of executing the variable display of the effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R) and the execution of the first effect, the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the timer image TMR is updated. It is possible to execute the second effect to be performed and the third effect in which the runaway action effect (specific effect) can be started only during the execution of the second effect. According to this configuration, when the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7, the runaway action effect (specific effect) may be started (developed, generated, and appeared). As a result, the player can expect the start (development, generation, appearance) of the runaway action effect (specific effect) as long as the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7, and thus the interest is improved. Can be planned.
Further, when the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7, the runaway action effect (specific effect) may be started (development, generation, appearance), so that the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7. Regarding various timer effects that are displayed, it is possible to contribute to eliminating (dispelling) the conventional monotonous countdown of timer images.
The same applies to the timer effect G of FIG. 50, the timer effect H of FIG. 51, the timer effect I of FIG. 52, the timer effect J of FIG. 53, the timer effect K of FIG. 54, and the timer effect L of FIG. 55.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the timer effect B of FIG. 45, the timer effect C of FIG. 46, the timer effect D of FIG. 47, the timer effect E of FIG. When the effect (that is, the runaway action effect (specific effect)) is started, the second effect (that is, the update display of the timer image TMR) is ended. According to this configuration, by ending the update display of the timer image TMR when the runaway action effect (specific effect) is started, the timer image TMR is misidentified by the player as the effect time of the runaway action effect (specific effect). It can be prevented from being done. The runaway action effect (specific effect) depends on the timer image TMR and can proceed without being terminated in the middle of the effect.
The same applies to the timer effect H of FIG. 51, the timer effect I of FIG. 52, the timer effect J of FIG. 53, the timer effect K of FIG. 54, and the timer effect L of FIG. 55.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the timer effect A of FIG. 44, when the timer image TMR reaches zero seconds (0 seconds), which is a predetermined time, a third effect (that is, a runaway action effect (specific effect) is achieved. )) Is not executed, and the second effect (that is, the update display of the timer image TMR) ends. According to this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the period during which the runaway action effect (specific effect) can be started (deployed, generated, and appeared) has passed.
The same applies to the timer effect G of FIG. 50.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the timer effect F of FIGS. 49 (B) to (F), in the second effect, a plurality of timer images called the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 are displayed, and the third effect. In the effect (that is, the runaway action effect (specific effect)), all of the plurality of timer images, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2, can be erased from the image display device 7. According to this configuration, a plurality of timer images, a timer image TMR1 and a timer image TMR2, are displayed, and then all the timer images disappear from the display screen 7a, so that a runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is started (development, Since it may be generated or appear), the timer effect L can contribute to eliminating (wiping) the conventional manner of monotonous countdown by the timer image.
The same applies to the timer effect L of FIGS. 55 (B) to 55 (F).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the timer effect A of FIG. 44, the timer effect B of FIG. 45, the timer effect C of FIG. 46, the timer effect D of FIG. 47, the timer effect E of FIG. In the effect F, the second effect displays the remaining time that has been counted down and updated as the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1, and the timer image TMR2. According to this configuration, the effect is not started (deployed, generated, appeared) after the monotonous countdown by the timer image is completed as in the conventional case, but the runaway action effect (specification) is performed during the countdown. Production) can be started (development, occurrence, appearance). That is, it is possible to increase the variation of the start (development, occurrence, appearance) timing of the runaway action effect (specific effect).
The same applies to the timer effect G of FIG. 50, the timer effect H of FIG. 51, the timer effect I of FIG. 52, the timer effect J of FIG. 53, the timer effect K of FIG. 54, and the timer effect L of FIG. 55.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the timer effect A of FIG. 44, the timer effect B of FIG. 45, the timer effect C of FIG. 46, the timer effect D of FIG. 47, the timer effect E of FIG. In the production F, the specific production is an SP reach production. According to this configuration, when the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 are updated and displayed, the runaway action effect (specific effect), which is the SP reach effect (development SP reach effect), is started (development, It can contribute to sustaining the expectation for (occurrence, appearance) to the player.
The same applies to the timer effect G of FIG. 50, the timer effect H of FIG. 51, the timer effect I of FIG. 52, the timer effect J of FIG. 53, the timer effect K of FIG. 54, and the timer effect L of FIG. 55.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the timer effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the timer effect A to the timer effect L of FIGS. 44 to 55, the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 were displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, an effect button image imitating the effect button 63 that can be operated by the player is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect button is displayed to the player. An image indicating that the operation (pressing operation) of 63 is performed (for example, a display mode in which a downward arrow image is repeatedly moved back and forth in the vertical direction near the effect button image, and a message of an image "press!" The display mode to be displayed, etc.) may also be displayed. In this way, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 to start (deploy, generate, appear) a runaway action effect (specific effect), the player can be given a sense of accomplishment. ..

[Modification 2]
In the timer effect A to the timer effect L of FIGS. 44 to 55, the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 were displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the display mode of the entire rectangular area of the timer image TMR is changed during the period immediately before the countdown by the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is started and the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) occurs. Good. For example, the entire rectangular area of the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is lit in gray (light gray or strong gray) → blue lit → green lit → yellow (gold) lit by changing the display mode to runaway action. It may suggest the degree of expectation for the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the production (runaway battle production). In this case, when the entire rectangular area of the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is set to seven colors (rainbow), the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is certain. Therefore, it may be suggested that the jackpot will be rich.

[Modification 3]
In the timer effect A to the timer effect L of FIGS. 44 to 55, the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 were displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The countdown by the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image TMR2 is started, and the runaway action production (runaway battle production) set with high expectation to be a big hit that gives profit to the player is started (deployment, occurrence, Appeared) in some cases. For gaming machines with small hits in addition to big hits, the start (development, occurrence, appearance) of runaway action effects (runaway battle effects) by various timer effects is applied to small hits in addition to big hits. You may.

[Modification example 4]
In the timer effect A of FIG. 44 and the timer effect G of FIG. 50, the timer image TMR disappears from the display screen 7a and the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is not started (deployed, generated, appeared). The timer production G has ended. This is the ROM 103 when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, the variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the timer effect A and the timer effect G. The corresponding image data was read from the image display device 7 and the image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 did not start (deploy, generate, appear) the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) by erasing the timer image TMR from the display screen 7a according to the execution instructions of the timer effect A and the timer effect G. .. However, even if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, the variation effect start command) and does not include an instruction to execute the timer effect A and the timer effect G, the timer The effect A and the timer effect G may be executed. In this case, the image control microcomputer 101 independently determines the start (development, generation, appearance) of the timer effect A and the timer effect G by lottery, and if it wins, executes the timer effect A and the timer effect G. When the image control microcomputer 101 starts executing the timer effect A and the timer effect G, the timer image TMR is erased from the display screen 7a and the runaway action effect (runaway battle effect) is not started (deployed, generated, or appeared). Even with this configuration, when the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7, there is a possibility that a runaway action effect (specific effect) will be started (deployed, generated, appear), and the player will be asked. As long as the timer image TMR is displayed on the image display device 7, the start (development, generation, appearance) of the runaway action effect (specific effect) can be expected, so that the interest can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the timer effect A to the timer effect L of FIGS. 44 to 55, when the timer effect A to the timer effect L is started, the timer image TMR, the timer image TMR1 and the timer image having a large rectangular area in the center of the display screen 7a are first generated. TMR2 was displayed, and then it was reduced and moved from the center of the display screen 7a toward the upper right side (upper right corner) or the upper left side (upper left corner). However, it may continue to be displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as it is. In this case, the display may be reduced so as to have the same size as when the size is reduced and moved toward the upper right side (upper right corner) or the upper left side (upper left corner). The display screen 7a may be reduced and moved from the center to another position different from the upper right side (upper right corner) or the upper left side (upper left corner). In this case, for example, the timer image TMR is located from the center of the display screen 7a to the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower right side (lower right upper corner), and from the center of the display screen 7a to the lower left side (lower right corner). The lower left corner) is arranged from the center of the display screen 7a to the outer peripheral side of the display screen 7a, such as the center side of the left side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 6]
The timer effect A of FIG. 44, the timer effect B of FIG. 45, the timer effect C of FIG. 46, the timer effect D of FIG. 47, the timer effect E of FIG. 48, the timer effect G of FIG. In the timer effect I of 52, the timer effect J of FIG. 53, and the timer effect K of FIG. 54, the timer image TMR shows the remaining time counted down from a single fixed time (here, 60 seconds). However, as the single fixed time, another single fixed time such as 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, 80 seconds, and 90 seconds may be adopted instead of 60 seconds, and a single fixed time may be adopted. It may be a fixed time of.

[Modification 7]
In the timer effect B of FIG. 45 (F), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". After that, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect B ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L And the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is changed again, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7"). Reach may be formed. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect B ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect C of FIG. 46 (H), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". After the temporary stop was displayed, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect C ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "4", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L And the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is changed again, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7"). Reach may be formed. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect C ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect D of FIG. 47 (G), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". After the temporary stop was displayed, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect D ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. Is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is re-variated, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7") to form a reach. You may do so. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect D ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect E of FIG. 48 (G), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed, the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form, and then from the display screen 7a. The timer image TMR disappeared, the timer effect E ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, and appeared). However, when the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form among the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol are switched. 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is re-variated, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7") to form a reach. You may do so. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect E ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect H of FIG. 51 (F), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". After the temporary stop was displayed, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect H ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L And the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is changed again, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7"). Reach may be formed. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect H ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect I of FIG. 52 (H), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "4". After the temporary stop was displayed, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect I ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L becomes the number "3", the middle effect symbol 8C becomes the number "7", and the right effect symbol 8R becomes the number "4", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L And the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is changed again, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7"). Reach may be formed. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect I ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect J of FIG. 53 (G), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3". After the temporary stop was displayed, the timer image TMR disappeared from the display screen 7a, the timer effect J ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, appeared). However, if the left effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "4", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "3", and the same symbols are not aligned and temporarily stopped, the right effect symbol 8R is displayed. Is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is re-variated, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7") to form a reach. You may do so. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect J ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.
Further, in the timer effect K of FIG. 54 (G), the left effect symbol 8L is the number "4", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "5". Of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R that are temporarily stopped and displayed, the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form, and then from the display screen 7a. The timer image TMR disappeared, the timer production K ended, and the runaway action (runaway battle) was started (deployed, generated, and appeared). However, when the character symbol of the right effect symbol 8R is switched to the character symbol of the wing man form among the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stopped, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol are switched. 8R is switched to the number "7" to display a temporary stop, and the middle effect symbol 8C is re-variated, so that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol (number "7") to form a reach. You may do so. Immediately before the reach is formed (for example, 1 second or 1.5 seconds before the reach is formed) or at the same time when the reach is formed, the timer image TMR disappears and the timer effect K ends. When the reach is formed, the runaway action (runaway battle) is started (deployed, generated, and appeared). In this case, if the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), it will be a big hit, but for example, the left. If the effect symbol 8L is the number "7", the middle effect symbol 8C is the number "3", and the right effect symbol 8R is the number "7", and the same symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, they are out of order.

[Modification 8]
The timer effects A to L of FIGS. 44 to 55 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added.

[Example]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means for displaying a plurality of production symbols.
The first effect of executing the variable display of the plurality of effect symbols, and
During the execution of the first effect, a second effect of displaying a timer on the display means and updating the timer, and
It is possible to execute the third effect, which can start the specific effect only during the execution of the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
When starting the third effect, the timer is turned off from the display means, and the second effect ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2.
When the timer reaches a predetermined time, the second effect ends without executing the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3.
In the second effect, a plurality of the timers are displayed, and the timers are displayed.
In the third effect, all of the plurality of timers are turned off from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4.
In the second effect, the remaining time that has been counted down and updated is displayed as the timer.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5.
The specific effect is an SP reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

In addition, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-mentioned display effect may be executed on the sub-display device.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 7a ... Display screen 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means for displaying a plurality of production symbols.
The first effect of executing the variable display of the plurality of effect symbols, and
During the execution of the first effect, a second effect of displaying a timer on the display means and updating the timer, and
It is possible to execute the third effect, which can start the specific effect only during the execution of the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When starting the third effect, the timer is turned off from the display means, and the second effect ends.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
When the timer reaches a predetermined time, the second effect ends without executing the third effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
In the second effect, a plurality of the timers are displayed, and the timers are displayed.
In the third effect, all of the plurality of timers are turned off from the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
In the second effect, the remaining time that has been counted down and updated is displayed as the timer.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The specific effect is an SP reach effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images